Data Elecin

Oficina: Av. San Luis 1986 – 308, San Borja, Lima – Perú, Tf.(51-1)715-1168 Fábrica: Las Fraguas 167 Urb.Industrial El Naranjal - Independencia, Lima-Perú Tf. (51-1)715-0952

e-mail: [email protected]; [email protected]; web: www.elecinperu.com

SUB ESTACION MODULAR COMPACTA 24KV, 20KA 60Hz.

FUNDICION CHILCA

CHILCA - LIMA

FUNDICION CHILCA S.A.

EXPEDIENTE TECNICO

PI: 100.12.160 P.I 100.12.212

FABRICADO POR ELECIN S.A.

NOVIEMBRE 2012

mailto:[email protected]




II.- INDICE I.- PORTADA

II.- INDICE

III.- DOCUMENTACION TECNICA

- Listado de Aparatos

IV.- PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS DE LOS EQUIPOS

- Protocolo de Transformador Seco 3000kva. - Protocolo de Transformador Seco 1000kva. - Protocolo de Sub Estación. - Protocolo de Relé de Protección. - Protocolo de Medidor Multifunción. - Protocolo de Transformador de Corriente de Fase. - Protocolo de Transformador de Tensión.

V.- ESQUEMAS DIMENSIONALES YFUNCIONALES

- Plano de Disposición y Dimensiones. - Plano Eléctrico Funcional.

VI.- ANEXOS

- Manuales de Equipos varios.





III.- DOCUMENTACION TECNICA



CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. Fecha: 9-ago-2012OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA Pag: 1/10

POS CANT TIPO MARCA1 1 SYStem6 SAREL

1.1 1 ITB SARELCubierta frontal : Plancha LAF 2,0mm ACC-347-381 500.12.038R1Cubierta lateral : Plancha LAF 2,0mm (Item-01)Cubierta intermedia : Plancha LAF 1,5mmCubierta posterior : Plancha LAF 2,0mmTecho plano : Plancha LAF 2,0mmAltura de instalación : 1000 m.s.n.m.Ejecución : IP3X, para InteriorPintura : Electrostática, color RAL 2004Luna Visora : NoDimensiones : Ancho = 750 mm

Profundidad = 1,000 mmAltura = 1,950 mm

Barras colectoras (M.T.) : 10x30 mmBarra de Tierra : 3x25 mmAislador Portabarra (M.T.) : Resina de 24kV

Equipamiento :52 Interruptor de potencia con camara de extincion de arco en vacio. 1 WL SAREL

Características: N° 5764-2012Tensión nominal : 24kVCorriente nominal : 630APoder de corte : 20kABIL : 125kVTensión de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kVEjecución : InteriorMontaje : LateralAccesorios:

- Bobina de apertura en 24Vcc- Bobina de cierre en 24Vcc- Motor para carga de resorte en 24Vcc.- Contactos auxiliares 6NC+6NA- Chapa de enclavamiento, incluye llave Ronies- Señalización de posición.- Contador de operaciones.- Manivela de operación manual- Llave de bloqueo con seccionador de linea

89L Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en 1 IM6SC-TD SARELSF6, mando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. N° 71993-2012Características:Tensión nominal : 24kVCorriente nominal : 630APoder de cierre Ith : 20kA

OBSERVACIONES:Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Elaborado por :Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Fernando Castillo O.Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Revisado por :Rev 3 : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

LISTADO DE APARATOS Nº 100.12.212

D E N O M I N A C I Ó NCELDAS DE 24KV, 20KACELDA MODULAR DE LLEGADA 24kV, 20KA, 60Hz

Av. San Luis 1986 – 308, San Borja, Lima – Perú, Tf/Fax.(51-1)715-1168

Fábrica: Las Fraguas 167 Urb. El Naranjal-Independencia, Lima-Perú Tf/Fax. (51-1)715-0952

[email protected], [email protected] web:www.elecinperu.com


POS CANT TIPO MARCABIL : 125kVTensión de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kVEjecución : FijaMontaje : LateralAccesorios:

- Placa de características- Palanca de mando- Seccionador de puesta a tierra PAT, enclavamiento mecánico con 89L- Aisladores capacitivos de 24kv y lampara de señalizacion 3- Mecanismo de operación KS

AT1-3 - Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. 3 INS-24-225-C01 SARELLAC - Lamparas señalizadoras de presencia de tension 1 SAREL

TI1-3 Transformador de corriente monofásico, fabricado con núcleo de fierro 3 AB13 TESAR silicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electrolíco de alta 500.12.029conductividad, encapsulado en resina epóxica. (Item-03)Características:

Aplicación : Medicion/ProtecciónPotencia : 15/15VARelación : 200-400/5-5AClase de precisión : 0.2/5P20Frecuencia : 60HzNº de fases : 1Clase de aislamiento : FNivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kVNivel de aislamiento BT : 0.6/3.0kVIntensidad térmica : 20kAIntensidad dinámica : 2.5IthSobrintensidad admisible : 120%Altitud de operación : 1 000m.s.n.m.Montaje : InteriorServicio : ContínuoNorma de fabricación : IEC 60044-1Año de fabricación : 2012Accesorios:

- Placa de característricas- Tapa de bornes en el lado de B.T.- Borne para conexión de puesta a tierra.- Base metálica para fijación.

F1 Relé trifásico digital multifunción. 1 NA60 THYTRONICCaracterísticas: N° 168961 500.12.058R1Funciones de Protección : 27, 49, 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 (Item-02)Tensión auxiliar : 24VccIn fase : 1/5A



D E N O M I N A C I Ó N

N° 2012-15-0175-03-04N° 2012-15-0175-03-05N° 2012-15-0175-03-06





POS CANT TIPO MARCAIn neutro : 1/5AFrecuencia : 60HzAccesorios:

- Entradas digitales : 3- Salidas digitales : 3- Puertos de comunicación : RS232/RS485- Protocolos : ModBus® RTU/IEC 60870-5-103

u1 Cargador de baterías. 1 DSE9250-001 DEEP SEA Características: N° 367615 ELECTRONICPotencia salida : 72 W.Tensión de entrada : 220 Vac.Tensión de salida : 24 Vcc.Corriente salida : 5 A.Accesorios:

- Contacto de salida NA : Falla de cargan1,2 Batería secas, 12Vcc, 7A-H, 35 A/arr. 2 NP7-12 YUASA

8.1 Disyuntor de control Tripolar, 2A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. 1 C60N Schneider

8.2 Disyuntor de control bipolar, 2A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. 1 C60N Schneider



-FC Bornera porta fusible bipolar, 4A gG, 32A 690vac 1 BCH Ital Weber

-Q1 Disyuntor de control unipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. 1 Xpole Pls4 Moeller

S1 Pulsador plano para Abrir Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1 XB4-BA31 Telemecanique1NA, color verde, Ø22mm.

S2 Pulsador plano para Cerrar Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1 XB4-BA42 Telemecanique1NA, color rojo, Ø22mm.

H1 Portalámpara con lámpara-led de señalización, Interruptor Abierto 1 XB4-BV63 Telemecanique24Vcc, color verde, F 22mm.

H2 Portalámpara con lámpara-led de señalización, Interruptor Cerrado 1 XB4-BV64 Telemecanique24Vcc, color rojo, F 22mm.

TC Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30°C, 250Vac, IP30 1 C16 Fantini Cosmi

RC1 Resistencia de calefacción 150W, 220 Vac 1 S/T SAREL

- Juego de Terminales de 24KV para cable unipolar N2XSY de 240mm. 1

- Soporte para cable unipolar seco, 24kV. 1OBSERVACIONES:Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Elaborado por :Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Fernando Castillo O.Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Revisado por :Rev 3 : Ing. Mario Cuya M.







POS CANT TIPO MARCAM1 Medidor electrónico multifunción 5A, 57-240V, 60Hz, que mide los siguientes 1 A1R-LQ+ ELSTER

parámetros , Energía activa, Energía reactiva, V, I, f.p, MD kW, MDkVar, 4 N° 14643644cuadrantes, perfil de carga; clase 0.2, 3 fases, 4 hilos, puerto óptico RS232,puerto de comunicación RS485.

1.2 CELDA TOMA DE TENSION DE BARRAS 1 MV SARELCelda autosoportada de ejecucion similar a Item 1.1 (500.12.038R1)Estructura : Plancha doblada 2.5mm (Item-02)Dimensiones : Ancho = 500 mm


Barras colectoras (M.T.) : 10x30 mmBarras derivación (M.T.) : - mmBarra de Tierra : 3 x 25 mmAislador Portabarra (M.T.) : Resina de 24kVEquipamiento :

89P Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en SF6, 1 IM6P-TF SARELmando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. N° 71994-2012Características:Tensión nominal : 24kVCorriente nominal : 630ACorriente de Interrupción : 630APoder de cierre : 40kACorriente de corta duración Ith : 20kABIL : 125kVTensión de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kVEjecución : FijaMontaje : LateralAccesorios:

- Placa de características- Palanca de mando- Bases portafusibles de 200A, con sistema de desconexión automática

a la fusión de cualquiera de los fusibles.- Enclavamiento mecánico con la puerta- Mecanismo de operación KP- Bobina de disparo 24Vcc.- Block de contactos auxiliares- Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. 3 INS-24-225-C01 SAREL- Lámpara de presencia de tensión. 1 SAREL



TC Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30°C, 250Vac, IP30 1 C16 Fantini CosmiOBSERVACIONES:Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Elaborado por :Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Fernando Castillo O.Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Revisado por :Rev 3 : Ing. Mario Cuya M.







POS CANT TIPO MARCARC1 Resistencia de calefacción 150W, 220 Vac 1 S/T SAREL

FU1,3 Cartucho fusible de alto poder de ruptura 24kV, para trafo de tensión. 3

TT1-3 Transformador de tension monofásico, fabricado con núcleo de fierro 3 VFB11 TESARsilicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electrolítico de (500.11.049)alta conductividad, encapsulado en resina epóxica. (Item-05)Características:

Aplicación : Medida/ProteccionPotencia : 30-50VARelación : 24:√3/0.24:√3-0.24:√3kV

Clase de precisión : 0.2Grupo de conexión : IiOFrecuencia : 60Hz.Nº de fases : 1Clase de aislamiento : FNivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kV.Nivel de aislamiento BT : 0,6/3kVEnfriamiento : SNANAltitud de operación : 1000 m.s.n.m.Montaje : Interior.Servicio : ContínuoNorma de fabricación : IEC 60044-1Año de fabricación : 2012Accesorios:

- Placa de característricas- Tapa de bornes en el lado de BT.- Borne para conexión de puesta a tierra.

1.3 CELDA MODULAR DE SALIDA Nº 1,3,4,5 24kV, 60Hz 4 ITI SARELCelda autosoportada de ejecucion similar a Item 1.1 (500.12.038R1)Estructura : Plancha doblada 2.5mm (Item-03)Dimensiones : Ancho = 750 mm



89L Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en 1 IM6S-TD SARELSF6, mando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. N° 71996-2012Características: N° 72000-2012Tensión nominal : 24kV N° 71995-2012Corriente nominal : 630A N° 71998-2012


N° 2012-15-0175-04-02



N° 2012-15-0175-04-03N° 2012-15-0684-05-06





POS CANT TIPO MARCAPoder de cierre Ith : 20kABIL : 125kVTensión de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kVEjecución : FijaMontaje : LateralAccesorios:

- Placa de características- Palanca de mando- Seccionador de tierra (enclavamiento mecánico)- Aisladores capacitivos de 24kv y lampara de señalizacion 3- Mecanismo de operación KS

AT1-3 - Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. 3 INS-24-225-C01 SAREL

LAC - Lamparas señalizadoras de presencia de tension 1 SAREL

52 Interruptor de potencia con camara de extincion de arco en vacio. 1 WL SAREL Características: N° 5763-2012Tensión nominal : 24kV N° 5766-2012Corriente nominal : 630A N° 5767-2012Poder de corte : 20kA N° 5768-2012BIL : 125kVTensión de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kVEjecución : InteriorMontaje : LateralAccesorios:


TI1-3 Transformador de corriente monofásico, fabricado con núcleo de fierro 3 AB16 TESAR silicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electrolíco de alta (500.12.029)conductividad, encapsulado en resina epóxica. (Item-02)Características: |

Aplicación : Medicion/ProtecciónPotencia : 15/15VARelación : 100-200/5-5AClase de precisión : 0.2/5P20Frecuencia : 60HzNº de fases : 1




N° 2012-15-0408-02-04N° 2012-15-0408-02-05N° 2012-15-0408-02-06

N° 2012-15-0408-02-01N° 2012-15-0408-02-02N° 2012-15-0408-02-03





POS CANT TIPO MARCAClase de aislamiento : FNivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kVNivel de aislamiento BT : 0.6/3.0kVIntensidad térmica : 20kAIntensidad dinámica : 2.5IthSobrintensidad admisible : 120%Altitud de operación : 1 000m.s.n.m.Montaje : InteriorServicio : ContínuoNorma de fabricación : IEC 60044-1Año de fabricación : 2011Accesorios:


F1 Relé trifásico digital multifunción. 1 NA011 THYTRONICCaracterísticas: (500.12.058R1)Funciones de Protección : 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 (Item-01)Tensión auxiliar : 24Vcc N° 165271In fase : 1/5A N° 165274In neutro : 1/5A N° 166438Frecuencia : 60Hz N° 166435Accesorios:











N° 2012-15-0408-03-06

N° 2012-15-0408-02-10N° 2012-15-0408-02-11N° 2012-15-0408-02-12


D E N O M I N A C I Ó NN° 2012-15-0408-03-04N° 2012-15-0408-03-05





POS CANT TIPO MARCATC Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30°C, 250Vac, IP30 1 C16 Fantini Cosmi



- Soporte para cable unipolar seco, 24kV. 1

1.4 CELDA MODULAR DE SALIDA Nº 2,6 24kV, 60Hz 2 ITI SARELCelda autosoportada de ejecucion similar a Item 1.1 (500.12.038R1)Estructura : Plancha doblada 2.5mm (Item-03)Dimensiones : Ancho = 750 mm



89L Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en 1 IM6S-TD SARELSF6, mando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. N° 71997-2012Características: N°71999-2012Tensión nominal : 24kVCorriente nominal : 630APoder de cierre Ith : 20kABIL : 125kVTensión de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kVEjecución : FijaMontaje : LateralAccesorios:

- Placa de características- Palanca de mando- Seccionador de tierra (enclavamiento mecánico)- Aisladores capacitivos de 24kv y lampara de señalizacion 3- Mecanismo de operación KS

AT1-3 - Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. 3 INS-24-225-C01 SAREL

LAC - Lamparas señalizadoras de presencia de tension 1 SAREL

52 Interruptor de potencia con camara de extincion de arco en vacio. 1 WL SAREL Características: N° 5765-2012Tensión nominal : 24kV N° 5769-2012Corriente nominal : 630APoder de corte : 20kABIL : 125kV








POS CANT TIPO MARCATensión de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kVEjecución : InteriorMontaje : LateralAccesorios:


TI1-3 Transformador de corriente monofásico, fabricado con núcleo de fierro 3 AB16 TESAR silicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electrolíco de alta (500.12.029)conductividad, encapsulado en resina epóxica. (Item-01)Características:

Aplicación : Medicion/ProtecciónPotencia : 15/15VARelación : 50-100/5-5AClase de precisión : 0.2/5P20Frecuencia : 60HzNº de fases : 1Clase de aislamiento : FNivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kVNivel de aislamiento BT : 0.6/3.0kVIntensidad térmica : 20kAIntensidad dinámica : 2.5IthSobrintensidad admisible : 120%Altitud de operación : 1 000m.s.n.m.Montaje : InteriorServicio : ContínuoNorma de fabricación : IEC 60044-1Año de fabricación : 2011Accesorios:


F1 Relé trifásico digital multifunción. 1 NA011 THYTRONICCaracterísticas: N° 165275 (500.12.058R1)Funciones de Protección : 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 N° 165276 (Item-01)Tensión auxiliar : 24Vcc


N° 2012-15-0408-01-05N° 2012-15-0408-01-06

N° 2012-15-0408-01-01N° 2012-15-0408-01-02N° 2012-15-0408-01-03

N° 2012-15-0408-01-04







POS CANT TIPO MARCAIn fase : 1/5AIn neutro : 1/5AFrecuencia : 60HzAccesorios:










TC Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30°C, 250Vac, IP30 1 C16 Fantini Cosmi



- Soporte para cable unipolar seco, 24kV. 1









IV.- PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS DE LOS

EQUIPOS



CLIENTE : EQUIPO: SUB ESTACION MODULAR COMPACTA

P.I. : 100.12.212

OBSERVACIONES

VERIFICACIÓN DE METRADO

VERIFICACIÓN DE ESPECIFICACIONES TÉCNICAS Sub Estación Modular

VERIFICACIÓN DE DIMENSIONES EXTERNAS 24KV, 20KA, 60Hz.

PRUEBA DE CONTINUIDAD DE CIRCUITOS N° ACC-347-381

PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO ELÉCTRICO N° 2012.00.0427

PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO MECÁNICO

PRUEBA DE AISLAMIENTO

Valores (MegaOhmios) M.T. B.T.

R - MASA = 1210 - GW

S - MASA = 1330 - GW

T - MASA = 1370 - GW

N - MASA = - - GW M.T. : 5 kVcc

FASE R - S = > 5000 - GW B.T. : 500Vcc

FASE S - T = > 5000 - GW MD5060e

FASE T - R = > 5000 - GW MEGABRAS

FASE R - N = - - GW

FASE S - N = - - GW

FASE T - N = - - GW

PRUEBA DE TENSION APLICADA 50kV, 1min, 60Hz Transformador de Prueba

FASE R - MASA = 5.70 - mA 81000/220 V

FASE S - MASA = 5.70 - mA

FASE T - MASA = 5.70 - mA Aplicada a Barras Colectoras

FASE R,S,T - MASA = 6.25 - mA y Aisladores Porta Barra

Probado por: Tec. Fernando Castillo Oliva

Fecha : 23-noviembre-2012

Supervisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya Miranda


Cliente:


CONTROL DE CALIDAD

CONFORME

PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS

FUNDICION CHILCA S.A.

PRUEBA REALIZADA RESULTADO

CONFORME

CONFORME

CONFORME

CONFORME

CONFORME

CONFORME

CONFORME

24KV, 20KA, 60Hz.

Av. San Luis 1986 – 308, San Borja, Lima – Perú, Tf/Fax.(51-1) 715-1168



VERBALE DI COLLAUDO TRASFORMATORI DI CORRENTE

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS TEST REPORT

RAPPORT DE ESSAI TRANSFORMATEURS DE COURANT

Cliente Conferma Posizione Matr. a

Client Acknowledge Item S/N toClient Confirmation Position Matr. at

Tipo Livello di isolamento [kV] Frequenza [Hz] Ith /

Type Insulation level FrequencyType Niveau d’isolement Frequence

Rapporto [A/A] / Prestazione [VA / Cl.] / Fs

Ratio BurdenRapport Prestation

/ Prestazione [VA / Cl.] / Fs

BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation

a) Verifica dei contrassegni dei terminali (8.1) Verification of terminals markings Vérification du marquage des bornes

b) Prova di tenuta a frequenza industriale dell'avvolgimento primario (8.2.1) Power-Frequency withstand test on primary winding Essais diélectriques à frequence industriélle des enroulementes primaires

c) Misura delle scariche parziali (8.2.2 / Proc. B) Partial discharge measurement Mesure des décharges partielles

* Tensione Presollecitazione / Prestressing Voltage / Tension de prestress

* Tensione Misura 1 / Measure Voltage 1 / Tension de mesure 1


d) Prova di tenuta a frequenza industriale degli avvolgimenti secondari (8.3) Power-Frequency withstand test on secondary windings Essais diélectriques à frequence industriélle des enroulementes secondaires

e) Prove di tenuta a frequenza industriale tra sezioni (8.3) Power-Frequency withstand tests between sections Essais diélectriques à frequence industriélle entre les sections

f) Prova di sovratensione tra le spire a 250 Hz (8.4 / Proc B) Up [V] Inter-Turn overvoltage test at 250 Hz Essais de surtension entre spires à 250 Hz

g) Determinazione degli errori (11.5 / 12.4 / 12.6) Determination of errors Determination des erreurs

I RISULTATI DELLE PROVE SODDISFANO I REQUISITI IMPOSTI DALLE NORME CEI EN/IEC 60044-1

TEST RESULTS ARE IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS CEI EN/IEC 60044-1LES RESULTAT DES ESSAIS SATISFONS LES CONDITIONS IMPOSE PAR LES STANDARDS CEI EN/IEC 60044-1

Emesso il Compilato Approvato

Issual date Compiled ApprovedEmis le Compiled Approuvé

24/04/2012 Corpuz Jackson

3 kV x 60 s

16,6 kV x 30 s

28,8 kV x 30 s

3 kV x 60 s

(1 x In) x 24 s

NO

TE

Equipos Electroindustriales S.A.

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

NO

TES

NO

TES

PRO

VE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

CARACTERIS

TIQ

UES

CARATTERIS

TIC

HE

CH

ARACTERIS

TIC

SRO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

40 kV x 60 s

50 kV x 60 s

200-400

2012.15.0175

VC TA rev. 6 del

03.09.2008

0175-03-060175-03-01

60

03

AB13 24 / 50 / 125

5

5

15 0,2

15

20 kA

5P20

1 s






Tipo Livello di isolamento [kV] Frequenza [Hz] Ith


Rapporto[A/A] / 5 Prestazione [VA/Cl] / Fs


/ 5 Prestazione [VA/Cl] / Fs

BurdenPrestation

/ Prestazione [VA/Cl] / Fs

BurdenPrestation

Matr. MORSETTI Rs75°

[Ω] Uexc [V] Iexc [A] Fs

S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES


[Ω] e.m.f.sl [V] Iexc [A] εc%

S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES

I VALORI MISURATI RIENTRANO NEI LIMITI INDICATI NELLE TABELLE 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 DELLE CEI EN/IEC 60044-1

THE MEASURED VALUES ARE IN THE LIMITS INDICATED IN TABLE 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 OF CEI EN/IEC 60044-1

LES VALEURES MESURE SONT DANS LES LIMITS INDIQUE DANS LES TABLEAUX 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 DES CEI EN/IEC 60044-1



0175-03-01

0175-03-02

0175-03-03

0175-03-04

0175-03-05

0175-03-06

0175-03-01 2S1-2S2 0,42 0,18 0,18

0,14

0,10

-0,09

100%

-0,09

0,13

-0,07

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

0,09

25%

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

100%

MESURE DES ERREURS DU RAPPORT ET D'ANGLE

0,01

COMPOSITE ERROR VERIFICATION

PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

Equipos Electroindustriales S.A. 2012.15.0175

200-400/525%

MISURA DEGLI ERRORI DI RAPPORTO E D'ANGOLO

Sec.

Sec. side

secondaire

120% In 100% InRapporto

Ratio

Raport

[A/A]

2S1-2S2100%

1S1-1S2

200-400/5

200-400/5

2S1-2S2100% -0,09

CAR

ACTER

ISTIQ

UES

AB13

200-400

-0,09

VERIFICATION DES ERREUR COMPOSEE

-0,01

-0,01

-0,08

-0,03

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008

0,03

η%

0,13

0

-0,03

0,01

0,04

01S1-1S2

-0,08

100%

25%

25%

100%

25%

-0,01

100%

0

0,04

-0,01

-0,10

-0,05

-0,01

200-400/5

200-400/5

200-400/5

200-400/5

1S1-1S2

2S1-2S2

200-400/5 2S1-2S2

200-400/5 2S1-2S2

1S1-1S2200-400/5

-0,09

ε [crad]

0,16200-400/5 1S1-1S2

0,22

0,08

Prest.

Burden

Prest.

-0,24

0,07

η% ε [crad]ε [crad] η%

20% In

0,12

1% In5% In

-0,08-0,02

0,04 0,10

ε [crad]

0,07

VERIFICA DEL FATTORE DI SICUREZZA

CAR

ATTER

ISTIC

HE

CH

AR

ACTER

ISTIC

S

20 kA / 1 s

1S1-1S225%

25%

2S1-2S2

-0,01-0,10

100%

25%

-0,07

25% 0,12

100%

25%

100%

100%

Corpuz Jackson

INSTRUMENT SECURITY FACTOR VERIFICATIONVERIFICATION DU FACTEUR DE SECURITE ASSIGNE

VERIFICA DELL' ERRORE COMPOSTO

24/04/2012

200-400/5

25%

100%

24 / 50 / 125

25%

η%

0175-03-060175-03-0103

0,215

5P2015

60

-0,43-0,01

0,04

96,9

CURRENT ERRORS AND PHASE DISPLACEMENT ERRORS MEASUREMENT

Matricola

S/N

Matricule η%ε [crad]











BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation
















3 kV x 60 s

16,6 kV x 30 s

28,8 kV x 30 s

3 kV x 60 s

(1 x In) x 24 s

NO

TE


ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

NO

TES

NO

TES

PRO

VE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

CARACTERIS

TIQ

UES

CARATTERIS

TIC

HE

CH

ARACTERIS

TIC

SRO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

40 kV x 60 s

50 kV x 60 s

50-100

2012.15.0408

VC TA rev. 6 del

03.09.2008

0408-01-120408-01-01

60

01

AB16 24 / 50 / 125

5

5

15 0,2

15

20 kA

5P20

1 s











BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES






2S1-2S2 0,27 1,25 1,25

0,15

0,16

-0,21

100%

-0,20

0,18

-0,08

25%

25%

25%

2S1-2S2100%

1S1-1S2

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

0,15

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

100%


50-100/525%


0408-01-01

100% InPrest.

Burden

Prest.

Rapporto

Ratio

Raport

[A/A]


PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

CAR

ACTER

ISTIQ

UES

AB16

50-100


Sec.

Sec. side

secondaire

120% In

0,08

50-100/5

50-100/5

2S1-2S2100%

0,10

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008

0,15

η%

0,10


0,06

0,10

-0,10

-0,22

-0,08

0,13

0,131S1-1S2

-0,23

100%

25%

100% 0,07

0,08

100% 0,08-0,12

0,08-0,14

0,09

0,08

2S1-2S2

1S1-1S250-100/5

0,17

-0,18

50-100/5

50-100/5

50-100/5

50-100/5

1S1-1S2

2S1-2S2

50-100/5

0,33

0,23 -0,14

-0,21 0,09

η%

20% In

0,17

ε [crad]

0,44

1% In5% In

-0,100,06

0,12 0,06

ε [crad]

0,17


CAR

ATTER

ISTIC

HE

CH

AR

ACTER

ISTIC

S

20 kA / 1 s

50-100/5 2S1-2S2

1S1-1S225%

25%

50-100/5 1S1-1S2-0,27

25%

η% ε [crad]ε [crad]

0,13

100%

25%

100%

100%

2S1-2S2

Corpuz Jackson



25/07/2012

-0,08

24 / 50 / 125

25%

50-100/5

100%

0,17

η%

0408-01-120408-01-0101

0,215

5P2015

60

-0,540,07

0,13

83,2


Matricola

S/N

Matricule η%

25%

0408-01-06

ε [crad]

0408-01-01

0408-01-02

0408-01-03

0408-01-04

0408-01-05

25%

100%











BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES







100% -0,21 0,1250-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,10 0,08

0,14

0408-01-12

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,16

100% -0,22 0,1050-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,11 0,07 0408-01-11

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,16 0,13

-0,21 0,1150-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,10 0,08

0,16 0,15

0408-01-10

50-100/5 1S1-1S225%

100%

100% -0,15 0,0750-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,11 0,07

0,12

0408-01-09

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,15

100% -0,22 0,0950-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,11 0,06 0408-01-08

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,15 0,12

100% -0,21 0,1050-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,09 0,06

0,16 0,10

ε [crad] η% ε [crad] η% ε [crad]

0408-01-07

50-100/5 1S1-1S225%

120% In 100% In 20% In 5% In 1% In

η% ε [crad] η% ε [crad] η%

PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1


CURRENT ERRORS AND PHASE DISPLACEMENT ERRORS MEASUREMENTMESURE DES ERREURS DU RAPPORT ET D'ANGLE

Matricola

S/N

Matricule

Rapporto

Ratio

Raport

[A/A]

Sec.

Sec. side

secondaire

Prest.

Burden

Prest.

VERIFICA DELL' ERRORE COMPOSTOCOMPOSITE ERROR VERIFICATION


VERIFICA DEL FATTORE DI SICUREZZAINSTRUMENT SECURITY FACTOR VERIFICATION

VERIFICATION DU FACTEUR DE SECURITE ASSIGNE

20 kA / 1 s

50-100 15 0,2

15 5P20

CAR

ATTER

ISTIC

HE

CH

AR

ACTER

ISTIC

S

CAR

ACTER

ISTIQ

UES

AB16 24 / 50 / 125 60

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008

Equipos Electroindustriales S.A. 2012.15.0408 01 0408-01-01 0408-01-12











BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES







100% -0,23 0,0950-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,11 0,06

0,11

0408-01-18

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,15

100% -0,21 0,0950-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,09 0,07 0408-01-17

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,16 0,13

-0,22 0,1050-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,11 0,07

0,17 0,12

0408-01-16

50-100/5 1S1-1S225%

100%

100% -0,19 0,0950-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,10 0,06

0,13

0408-01-15

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,17

100% -0,21 0,1050-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,12 0,07 0408-01-14

50-100/5 1S1-1S225% 0,14 0,13

100% -0,25 0,1250-100/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,11 0,06

0,15 0,11


0408-01-13

50-100/5 1S1-1S225%

120% In 100% In 20% In 5% In 1% In


PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1



Matricola

S/N

Matricule

Rapporto

Ratio

Raport

[A/A]

Sec.

Sec. side

secondaire

Prest.

Burden

Prest.





20 kA / 1 s

50-100 15 0,2

15 5P20

CAR

ATTER

ISTIC

HE

CH

AR

ACTER

ISTIC

S

CAR

ACTER

ISTIQ

UES

AB16 24 / 50 / 125 60

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008












BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation
















3 kV x 60 s

16,6 kV x 30 s

28,8 kV x 30 s

3 kV x 60 s

(1 x In) x 24 s

NO

TE


ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

NO

TES

NO

TES

PRO

VE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

CARACTERIS

TIQ

UES

CARATTERIS

TIC

HE

CH

ARACTERIS

TIC

SRO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

40 kV x 60 s

50 kV x 60 s

100-200

2012.15.0408

VC TA rev. 6 del

03.09.2008

0408-02-120408-02-01

60

02

AB16 24 / 50 / 125

5

5

15 0,2

15

20 kA

5P20

1 s











BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES






2S1-2S2 0,344 0,36 0,36

0,16

0,14

-0,15

100%

-0,15

0,13

-0,05

25%

25%

25%

2S1-2S2100%

1S1-1S2

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

0,15

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

100%


100-200/525%


0408-02-01

100% InPrest.

Burden

Prest.

Rapporto

Ratio

Raport

[A/A]


PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

CAR

ACTER

ISTIQ

UES

AB16

100-200


Sec.

Sec. side

secondaire

120% In

0,07

100-200/5

100-200/5

2S1-2S2100%

0,05

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008

0,10

η%

0,07


0,07

0,12

-0,06

-0,22

-0,07

0,13

0,131S1-1S2

-0,13

100%

25%

100% 0,08

0,09

100% 0,05-0,08

0,06-0,08

0,05

0,08

2S1-2S2

1S1-1S2100-200/5

0,15

-0,13

100-200/5

100-200/5

100-200/5

100-200/5

1S1-1S2

2S1-2S2

100-200/5

0,33

0,19 0,01

-0,17 0,03

η%

20% In

0,16

ε [crad]

0,34

1% In5% In

-0,080,07

0,12 0,11

ε [crad]

0,18


CAR

ATTER

ISTIC

HE

CH

AR

ACTER

ISTIC

S

20 kA / 1 s

100-200/5 2S1-2S2

1S1-1S225%

25%

100-200/5 1S1-1S2-0,22

25%

η% ε [crad]ε [crad]

0,09

100%

25%

100%

100%

2S1-2S2

Corpuz Jackson



07/09/2012

-0,07

24 / 50 / 125

25%

100-200/5

100%

0,16

η%

0408-02-120408-02-0102

0,215

5P2015

60

-0,400,08

0,12

90


Matricola

S/N

Matricule η%

25%

0408-02-06

ε [crad]

0408-02-01

0408-02-02

0408-02-03

0408-02-04

0408-02-05

25%

100%











BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES







100% -0,22 0,05100-200/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,05 0,09

0,13

0408-02-12

100-200/5 1S1-1S225% 0,13

100% -0,17 0,03100-200/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,07 0,08 0408-02-11

100-200/5 1S1-1S225% 0,16 0,13

-0,15 0,08100-200/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,04 0,06

0,13 0,10

0408-02-10

100-200/5 1S1-1S225%

100%

100% -0,19 0,07100-200/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,08 0,09

0,12

0408-02-09

100-200/5 1S1-1S225% 0,17

100% -0,13 0,06100-200/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,06 0,08 0408-02-08

100-200/5 1S1-1S225% 0,14 0,13

100% -0,14 0,05100-200/5 2S1-2S2

25%

100% -0,05 0,05

0,13 0,10


0408-02-07

100-200/5 1S1-1S225%

120% In 100% In 20% In 5% In 1% In


PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1



Matricola

S/N

Matricule

Rapporto

Ratio

Raport

[A/A]

Sec.

Sec. side

secondaire

Prest.

Burden

Prest.





20 kA / 1 s

100-200 15 0,2

15 5P20

CAR

ATTER

ISTIC

HE

CH

AR

ACTER

ISTIC

S

CAR

ACTER

ISTIQ

UES

AB16 24 / 50 / 125 60

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008












BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation















40 kV x 60 s

50 kV x 60 s

200-400

2012.15.0408

VC TA rev. 6 del

03.09.2008

0408-03-060408-03-01

60

03

NO

TE


ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

NO

TES

NO

TES

PRO

VE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

CARACTERIS

TIQ

UES

CARATTERIS

TIC

HE

CH

ARACTERIS

TIC

SRO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1


3 kV x 60 s

16,6 kV x 30 s

28,8 kV x 30 s

3 kV x 60 s

(1 x In) x 24 s

AB13 24 / 50 / 125

5

5

15 0,2

15

20 kA

5P20

1 s











BurdenPrestation


BurdenPrestation



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES



S/N TERMINAL

Matr. BORNES






0408-03-06

ε [crad]

0408-03-01

0408-03-02

0408-03-03

0408-03-04

0408-03-05

60

-0,270,07

0,09

96


Matricola

S/N

Matricule η%η%

0408-03-060408-03-0103

0,215

5P2015

25%

100%

24 / 50 / 125

25%

200-400/5

100%

Corpuz Jackson



17/07/2012

-0,06

25% 0,11

100%

25%

100%

2S1-2S2

0,05-0,06

100%

25%

200-400/5 2S1-2S2

1S1-1S225%

25%


CAR

ATTER

ISTIC

HE

CH

AR

ACTER

ISTIC

S

20 kA / 1 s

1% In5% In

-0,080,06

0,09 0,09

ε [crad]

0,14

0,02

η% ε [crad]ε [crad] η%

20% In

0,11

ε [crad]

0,20200-400/5 1S1-1S2

-0,15 0,24

0,14

-0,12 0,05

0,09

200-400/5

200-400/5

200-400/5

200-400/5

1S1-1S2

2S1-2S2

200-400/5 2S1-2S2

1S1-1S2200-400/5

0,04

-0,07

-0,15

0,08

0,06

100%

25%

100%

25%

0,04

1S1-1S2

-0,12

100%

25%

0,09

0,06

0,08

0,11

-0,08

-0,12

-0,10

0,07

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008

0,09

η%

0,04


0,05

00,06

200-400/5

200-400/5

2S1-2S2100%

CAR

ACTER

ISTIQ

UES

AB13

200-400


Sec.

Sec. side

secondaire

120% In


0408-03-01

100% InPrest.

Burden

Prest.

Rapporto

Ratio

Raport

[A/A]


200-400/525%


PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

0,14

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

60044-1

I

EC 6

0044-1

100%

0,10

2S1-2S2100%

1S1-1S2

100%

-0,10

0,11

-0,08

25%

2S1-2S2 0,41 0,31 0,31

0,10

0,10

-0,10

VERBALE DI COLLAUDO TRASFORMATORI DI TENSIONE

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS TEST REPORT

RAPPORT DE ESSAI TRANSFORMATEURS DE TENSION

Cliente Conferma Posizione 04 Matr. a


Tipo Livello di isolamento [kV] Frequenza [Hz] Fatt. di tens.

Type Insulation level Frequency Voltage factorType Niveau d’isolement Frequence Facteur de tension

Rapporto [V/V] /√3 / Prestazione [VA / Cl.] /


/ Prestazione [VA / Cl.] /

BurdenPrestation

/ Prestazione [VA / Cl.] /

BurdenPrestation


b) Prova di tenuta a frequenza industriale dell'avvolgimento primario (9.2.2.1) Power-Frequency withstand test on primary winding Essais diélectriques à frequence industriélle des enroulementes primaires

* Prova di tenuta con sorgente separata (tensione applicata) (9.2.2.1 / Par a)

Separate source withstand voltage test Essais diélectriques avec separèe source

* Prova di tenuta con tensione indotta 250 Hz / 200 Hz (9.2.2.1 / Par b) Induced voltage withstand test 250 Hz / 200 Hz Essais diélectriques avec tension induit 250 Hz / 200 Hz


* Tensione Presollecitazione / Prestress Voltage / Tension de prestress

* Tensione Misura 1 / Measure Voltage / Tension de mesure



e) Determinazione degli errori (12.3 / 13.7.1) Determination of errors Determination des erreurs





2012.15.0175Equipos Electroindustriales S.A.

24000

27/04/2012 Luca Papalini

3 kV x 60 s

16,6 kV x 30 s

40 kV x 60 s

50 kV x 24 s / 30 s

CARATTERIS

TIC

HE

PRO

VE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

ORM

E C

EI

EN

60044-2

I

EC 6

0044-2

CH

ARACTERIS

TIC

S

CARACTERIS

TIQ

UES

NO

TE

NO

TES

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-2

IE

C 6

0044-2

NO

TES

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DARD

S C

EI

EN

60044-2

I

EC 6

0044-2

VC TV rev. 7 del

15.02.2010

3 kV x 60 s

28,8 kV x 30 s

60

0175-04-060175-04-01

FB11

240/√3

240/√3

30 0,2

3P50

1,2 / Cont. & 1,9 / 8 h24 / 50 / 125

VERBALE DI COLLAUDO TRASFORMATORI DI TENSIONE

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS TEST REPORT

RAPPORT DE ESSAI TRANSFORMATEURS DE TENSION



Tipo Livello di isolamento [kV] Frequenza [Hz] Fatt. di tens.

Type Insulation level Frequency Voltage factorType Niveau d’isolement Frequence Facteur de tension

Rapporto [V/V] / Prestazione [VA/Cl] /


/ Prestazione [VA/Cl] /

BurdenPrestation

/ Prestazione [VA/Cl] /

BurdenPrestation

I VALORI MISURATI RIENTRANO NEI LIMITI INDICATI NELLE TABELLE 11 - 12 DELLE CEI EN/IEC 60044-2

THE MEASURED VALUES ARE IN THE LIMITS INDICATED IN TABLE 11 - 12 OF CEI EN/IEC 60044-2

LES VALEURES MESURE SONT DANS LES LIMITS INDIQUE DANS LES TABLEAUX 11-12 DES CEI EN/IEC 60044-2



ε [crad]

2% Vn

0,10

0,11

0,10

0,08

ε [crad]η% η%

50 3P

80% Vn

0,28

25%

0,08

-0,12

ε [crad]η%

Prest.

Burden

Prest.

100% Vn120% Vn

25%

0175-04-02

100%

1a-1n

2a-2n

25%

25%

100%

100%

25%

100%

25%

100%

24000:v3 /

240:v3

100%

1a-1n

25%

100%

2a-2n100%

25%

24000/√3 0,2

0,0824000:v3 /

240:v31a-1n

0,14

ε [crad]

Sec.

sec. Side

secondaire η%

Rapporto

Ratio

Raport

[V/V]

240/√3 30

0,28

-0,37

0,06

-0,10

100%

2a-2n24000:v3 /

240:v3

0,10 -0,12

0,0925% 0,05 0,13

-0,43

-0,12

0,11

0,30

0,08

0,16

0,14 0,14

-0,30

0,03

0,22

0,20

0,10

-0,38

0,10

0,10 0,11

0,06

0,08-0,14

-0,37 0,27

100%

25%

100%

25%

100%

25%

25%

1,2 / Cont. & 1,9 / 8 hFB11

VOLTAGE ERRORS AND PHASE DISPLACEMENT ERRORS MEASUREMENT

VC TV rev. 7 del 15.02.2010

24 / 50 / 125 60

0175-04-012012.15.0175

η% ε [crad]

190% Vn

240/√3


04

Matricola

S/N

Matricule

27/04/2012

CARATTERIS

TIC

HE

CH

ARACTERIS

TIC

S

CARACTERIS

TIQ

UES

PR

OVE I

ND

IVID

UALI

- N

OR

ME C

EI

60044-2

I

EC 6

0044-2

RO

UTIN

E T

ESTS -

STAN

DAR

DS C

EI

60044-2

I

EC 6

0044-2

ESSAIS

GEN

ERAU

X -

STAN

DAR

DS C

EI

60044-2

I

EC 6

0044-2

0175-04-01

25%


100%

0175-04-03

24000:v3 /

240:v3

24000:v3 /

240:v3

100%

24000:v3 /

240:v3

25%

100%

25%

0175-04-06Equipos Electroindustriales S.A.

Luca Papalini

100%



V.- ESQUEMAS DIMENSIONALES Y

ELECTRICOS





VI.- ANEXOS



Av. San Luis 1986 – 307, San Borja, Lima – Perú, Tf.(51-1)715-1169 Fax: 224-3571 Fábrica: Las Fraguas 167 Urb. El Naranjal-Independencia, Lima-Perú Tf. (51-1)715-0952 Fax:523-3165

Oficina e-mail: [email protected] fabrica e-mail: [email protected] web:www.elecinperu.com

1

MANUAL DE MONTAJE, PUESTA EN SERVICIO Y MANTENIMIENTO

1.

GENERALIDADES

Las Celdas Modulares Compactas “ELECIN” han sido desarrolladas con la finalidad

de disponer de un conjunto de equipos para distribución y/o transformación, cuando se

requieran de dimensiones reducidas, ya sea para instalación interior o exterior.

Una de las características más importantes de este tipo de celdas es que emplea

aparatos convencionales como son los seccionadores de potencia, interruptores,

fusibles y transformadores.

2.

INTRODUCCION

Este manual contiene información básica de la fabricación, descripción de los equipos,

instalación, operación y mantenimiento para una correcta utilización de las celdas

Compactas Modulares de 24kV, 20KA, 60Hz, suministrada por la compañía ELECIN

S.A., para la empresa FUNDICION CHILCA S.A.

3.

DESCRIPCION GENERAL DE LA SUBESTACIÓN

Las celdas son del tipo autosoportada, ejecución para montaje interior, fabricada con

plancha galvanizada de 2.0mm. , provista de refuerzos para garantizar su solidez así

como de los aparatos incorporados; de las siguientes dimensiones:

Ancho : 750 mm.

Celda de Llegada

Profundidad : 1000 mm.

Altura : 1950 mm.

Ancho : 500 mm.

Celda de Toma de Tensión de Barras


Altura : 1950 mm.




2

Ancho : 750 mm.

Celda de Salida 1,2,3,4,5,6


Altura : 1950 mm.

Las celdas posee puertas, cubierta lateral y frontal, techos en planchas de 2mm de

espesor, además tiene cubierta posterior, las celdas están separadas entre sí por

plancha LAF de 1.5 mm de espesor.

Todos los componentes de fierro son sometidos a un proceso de pintura electrostática

de alta protección corrosiva aún bajo las condiciones más exigentes, con acabado

color: RAL 2004.

La celda de llegada tiene una puerta frontal para la inspección del interruptor en vacio

MARCA SAREL, las maniobras de cierre y apertura del conjunto se realizan desde la

parte frontal de la celda a puerta cerrada ya que cuentan con enclavamientos

mecánicos por medio de llaves de bloqueo. Así mismo esta celda cuenta con un

tablero de control y protección el cual está equipado con pulsadores de mando para

las maniobras del interruptor, para el sistema de protección se cuenta con un Relé de

protección para fallas por Mínima y Máxima Tensión, Sobre Corriente y Cortocircuito

de Fase. También cuenta con un sistema de Medición, mediante un medidor

totalizador en la celda de llegada.

Las celdas de salida 1….6, cuentan con un interruptor y seccionador de barra. Las

maniobra del seccionador son mediante palanca de acceso frontal.

Todos los componentes de fierro son sometidos a un proceso de pintura electrostática

de alta protección corrosiva aún bajo las condiciones más exigentes.

4. DESCRIPCIÓN DE LOS APARATOS

El equipamiento en su totalidad de la Subestación se encuentra en el listado de

aparatos Nº 100.12.212.




3

5. OPERACIÓN Y SISTEMA DE ENCLAVAMIENTOS

El equipamiento con Interruptor Sarel y Seccionador de Línea a Tierra con el cuál se

encuentra equipada las celdas Compactas Modulares opera de la siguiente forma:

CELDA DE LLEGADA

5.1.

MANIOBRA DE CIERRE

• Cerrar la puerta de la celda de Llegada, retirar la llave de bloqueo, insertar la otra

llave en el mando de tierra del Seccionador de Linea, girar en sentido horario para

abrir la tierra, insertar la palanca en el mando para cerrar el seccionador de Linea,

retirar la palanca y cerrar el acceso a ella girando la llave y luego retirarla.

• Con la otra llave que se encuentra en este bloque de llaves desbloquear el

interruptor, luego presionar el botón verde del interruptor o utilizando los

pulsadores de maniobras ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posición de

cierre se visualiza en el interruptor con un icono de color rojo y en el tablero con el

encendido de una lámpara de color roja lo cual nos indica que el interruptor está

cerrado. Hasta ahí se tiene ya energizada toda la subestación, en esta posición el

bloque de llaves queda insertado en el interruptor ya que solo se podrá retira

cuando el interruptor este en posición abierto. Esta operación de bloqueo es como

seguridad para prevenir una mala maniobra.

5.2.

MANIOBRA DE APERTURA

• Para des energizar la subestación se debe abrir primero el interruptor, para ello se

debe presión el botón rojo del interruptor o utilizando los pulsadores de maniobras

ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posición de apertura se puede

visualizar en el interruptor con un icono de color verde y en el tablero con el

encendido de una lámpara de color verde lo cual nos indica que el interruptor está

abierto. Retirar el juego de llaves para bloquear el interruptor y evitar un cierre no

deseado.

• Con la llave de acceso al mando del Seccionador de Línea, liberar el acceso para

insertar la palanca de maniobra. Girar la palanca en sentido anti horario para abrir




4

el seccionador de línea. En esta posición el bloque de llaves no saldrá del acceso.

Ya que solo saldrá la llave cuando el Seccionador de Línea este cerrado.

• Con la llave de acceso al Seccionador de Tierra, liberar el acceso para insertar la

palanca de maniobra, girar en sentido anti horario para cerrar el Seccionador de

Tierra. En esta posición se podrá acceder al cubículo.

CELDA DE SALIDA

5.3.

MANIOBRA DE CIERRE

• Cerrar la puerta de la celda de Salida, insertar la palanca de maniobra en el mando

del Seccionador de Tierra, girar en sentido horario, luego insertar la palanca en el

mando para cerrar el Seccionador de Linea, retirar la palanca y cerrar el acceso a

ella girando la llave y luego retirarla.

• Con la otra llave que se encuentra en este bloque de llaves desbloquear el

interruptor, luego presionar el botón verde del interruptor o utilizando los

pulsadores de maniobras ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posición de

cierre se visualiza en el interruptor con un icono de color rojo y en el tablero con el

encendido de una lámpara de color roja lo cual nos indica que el interruptor está

cerrado. Hasta ahí se tiene ya energizada toda la subestación, en esta posición el

bloque de llaves queda insertado en el interruptor ya que solo se podrá retira

cuando el interruptor este en posición abierto. Esta operación de bloqueo es como

seguridad para prevenir una mala maniobra.

5.4.

MANIOBRA DE APERTURA

• Para des energizar la subestación se debe abrir primero el interruptor, para ello se

debe presión el botón rojo del interruptor o utilizando los pulsadores de maniobras

ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posición de apertura se puede

visualizar en el interruptor con un icono de color verde y en el tablero con el

encendido de una lámpara de color verde lo cual nos indica que el interruptor está

abierto. Retirar el juego de llaves para bloquear el interruptor y evitar un cierre no

deseado.




5

• Con la llave de acceso al mando del Seccionador de Línea, liberar el acceso para

insertar la palanca de maniobra. Girar la palanca en sentido anti horario para abrir

el seccionador de línea. En esta posición el bloque de llaves no saldrá del acceso.

Ya que solo saldrá la llave cuando el Seccionador de Línea este cerrado.

• Con la llave de acceso al Seccionador de Tierra, liberar el acceso para insertar la

palanca de maniobra, girar en sentido anti horario para cerrar el Seccionador de

Tierra. En esta posición se podrá acceder al cubículo.

6.

PROTECCIONES

La celda de llegada está equipada con un sistema de protección contra fallas por

Mínima y Máxima Tensión, Sobre corriente y cortocircuitos de fase. Para ello se tiene

instalado un Relé de protección contra estas fallas marca TRYTRONIC del tipo NA60

función 27, 59, 50/51, 50N/51N, 67 el cual realizara un disparo (TRIP) hacia el

interruptor de potencia el cual abrirá el sistema para proteger a los equipos, también el

relé mostrara en pantalla el tipo de falla que se origino.

La celda de Salida está equipada con un sistema de protección contra fallas por

Sobre corriente y cortocircuitos de fase. Para ello se tiene instalado un Relé de

protección contra estas fallas marca TRYTRONIC del tipo NA011 función 50/51,

50N/51N, 67 el cual realizara un disparo (TRIP) hacia el interruptor de potencia el cual

abrirá el sistema para proteger a los equipos, también el relé mostrara en pantalla el

tipo de falla que se origino.

ACCCION FRENTE A UNA FALLA

Cuando ocurre una falla el relé mandara la orden de apertura al interruptor el cual

abrirá el circuito. Para reponer el servicio se debe realizar una inspección previa y

rápida de la falla para poder reponer el servicio lo más antes posible.

1.- Verificar el origen de la falla.

2.- Inspeccionar que los equipos no hayan sufrido daños.

3.- Verificar que la falla se haya eliminado, ya que de persistir el relé ordenara

nuevamente la apertura.

4.- Resetear el relé de protección para ponerlo en modo de operación nuevamente.




6

Todo el sistema de control, maniobras y protección requieren un voltaje de 24 Vcc

como alimentación auxiliar para lo cual la subestación está equipada con 2 baterías de

12 Vcc conectadas en serie y un cargador de baterías que como entrada requiere una

alimentación de 220 Vca este sistema en conjunto nos brinda el voltaje de control para

el funcionamiento de la subestación.

IMPORTANTE.

Las baterías deben trabajar en conjunto con el cargador de baterías, ya que si no es

así las baterías tienen una autonomía de 8 horas, pasado ese tiempo se corre el

riesgo de que las baterías se descarguen y disminuya la vida útil de las mismas. Es

por eso que la alimentación de 220 Vca no debe ser interrumpido por más de 8 horas

para que el cargador este trabajando e impida que las baterías se descarguen.

7.

ENTREGA EN FABRICA

Nuestros equipos son fabricados con diseños óptimos, utilizando materiales de la

mejor calidad y siguiendo estrictamente las recomendaciones de las normas

internacionales.

Durante la fabricación son sometidos a un exigente control de calidad y al término, de

la misma, se realizan las pruebas de comprobación en todas las unidades.

Conjuntamente con la subestación, nuestra empresa entrega protocolos de prueba y

una carta de garantía de los equipos suministrados.

Por razones de seguridad la Subestación Compacta Modular se entrega separada del

transformador de distribución para facilitar el transporte y la maniobra en obra.

8.

TRANSPORTE

Antes de proceder al transporte se verificó que la Subestación y todo su equipamiento

estén en perfectas condiciones. (Cuando el transporte se realiza fuera de Lima, se

requerirá embalaje)

Para el transporte se debe tener las siguientes precauciones:

• Asegurar que la Subestación y el transformador no sufran desplazamientos sobre la

plataforma.




7

• Manipular con cuidado sobre todo cuando se trate de material frágil.

• Recomendar al transportista conservar velocidad baja, para evitar movimientos

bruscos.

• Observar las marcas de los bultos y respetar la posición de transporte.

• Verificar que todas las válvulas y respiraderos del transformador estén

herméticamente cerrados.

9.

RECEPCIÓN EN OBRA

Para la recepción en obra el usuario deberá considerar los siguientes aspectos:

• Revisar minuciosamente la Subestación en su conjunto, comprobando que ésta y

todos sus componentes no hayan sufrido ningún tipo de daño en el transporte.

• Verificar que todos los accesorios de la Subestación estén completos: barras de

cobre, aisladores porta barras, ferretería, etc.

• Comprobar que los bultos hayan sido transportados según las indicaciones y

señalizaciones correspondientes.

• Verificar que los datos de placa de características de los diferentes equipos

correspondan a la especificación del proyecto.

• Verificar que no se haya producido pérdidas de aceite en el transformador, además

que no presenten filtraciones; asimismo controlar el nivel de aceite.

• Comprobar que todas las válvulas y respiraderos hayan llegados herméticamente

cerrados y así deberán quedar si el transformador permanecerán cerrados.

10.

INSPECCIONES PRELIMINARES

• Ante de realizar las pruebas de resistencia de aislamiento a los equipos de la

Subestación, cerciorarse si es que existe elementos que no deban ser sometidos a

dichas pruebas tales como tarjetas electrónicas y/o elementos extraños que puedan

influir en el resultado de las mediciones.




8

• Revisar y proceder de acuerdo a las instrucciones indicadas en los manuales de

servicio de cada equipo y/o aparato.

• Medir el aislamiento fase-fase y fase-tierra. Los instrumentos de medición o

dispositivos de control que no estén especificados para este tipo de pruebas serán

aislados y conectados a tierra.

• Verificar el correcto funcionamiento mecánico de los equipos.

• Operar cada dispositivo magnético (si los hubiera), con la finalidad de observar que

todo los elementos móviles operen libremente.

• Verificar el ajuste de todos los relés, potenciómetros y demás elementos de

calibración (si los hubiera), de tal manera que estén convenientemente regulados,

tal como lo describen sus propios manuales de operación y puesta en servicio.

• Verificar si el cableado de control esté correctamente conectado y de acuerdo a los

planos suministrados.

• Verificar la conexión de los circuitos de fuerza.

• Verificar los fusibles de control. (si los hubiera)

11.

OPERACIÓN INICIAL Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO

• Verificar que todos los equipos de corte y seccionamiento se encuentren en la

posición de reposo.

• Alimentar los circuitos de mando, control y servicios auxiliares, verificar el correcto

funcionamiento de todas las señales. (si los hubiera)

• Efectuar maniobras con los equipos en posición de prueba.

• Verificar el correcto funcionamiento de los demás equipos de medida y protección

como amperímetros, medidores, relés de protección, etc. (si los hubiera)

• Verificar que la tensión y frecuencia de la red, así como la altitud y la temperatura

ambiente concuerden con las características técnicas de la S.E. y de los equipos.




9

• Chequear que las conexiones entre los bornes de los aparatos y las barras

colectoras estén bien ajustadas y apropiadamente dimensionadas. Así también las

conexiones a tierra.

• Sólo después de realizar las verificaciones anteriores, se podrá efectuar maniobras

sin carga, verificando simultáneamente el correcto funcionamiento de los diferentes

equipos.

• Dentro de la cajuela se encuentran borneras seccionables cortocrcuitables los

cuales esta cortocircuitadas en el caso de señal de corriente. Los cuales antes de

poner en servicio se deberá quitar el puente.

12.

INSTRUCCIONES DE MANTENIMIENTO

• Remover el polvo y suciedad acumulados usando brochas, telas suaves y/o

aspirador.

• Limpiar todas las barras colectoras y de tierra.

• Inspeccionar las uniones de las barras colectoras y de tierra; ajustarlas si es

necesario.

• Retirar los dispositivos y alimentadores de tal forma de poder remover todo el polvo

o suciedad que se pueda haber acumulado.

• Verificar el correcto funcionamiento de los instrumentos como relés, contactos

auxiliares, fusibles, etc., más críticos y reemplazarlos de ser necesario.

• Revise el estado de los conductores si no tienen hilos cortados o aislamiento o si la

chaqueta está deteriorada.

• Reemplace las etiquetas de identificación si estas se encuentran ilegibles.

• No emplear solventes que puedan dañar los equipos.

• No engrase ni aceite los equipos, a menos que lo indique el fabricante.




10

• En todas las operaciones de mantenimiento emplear siempre las herramientas

apropiadas y en buen estado para evitar esfuerzas no necesarios, que dañen los

equipos.

• Realizar limpieza de aisladores cada 12 meses.

• Medir la resistencia de los pozos de tierra Rt < 5 Ohms cada 12 meses.

13.

RECOMENDACIONES GENERALES

Para el buen funcionamiento de la Subestación debe tenerse en cuenta la siguiente:

• El lugar de operación debe estar libre de objetos extraños como cajones, escaleras,

etc., que obstruyan las operaciones de maniobra.

• El lugar de trabajo debe estar ventilado adecuadamente y no debe existir elementos

combustibles en las proximidades.

• Tomar las precauciones debidas a fin de evitar los aniegos de agua de limpieza,

lluvias, etc., lleguen a sus proximidades poniendo en peligro al operador. (nunca

opere un equipo eléctrico en estas condiciones).

• Deberá contar con una apropiada toma de tierra para evitar descargas peligrosas.

• Las conexiones de entrada y salida deberán estar perfectamente realizadas, con

los terminales apropiados y el uso de pernos y arandelas de seguridad.

• Nunca efectué servicio de mantenimiento a ningún equipo eléctrico cuando éste se

encuentre energizado.

• Verifique que todas las conexiones estén debidamente ajustadas. Esto comprende

barras, conductores sólidos o cableados, etc.

• No emplear aire comprimido para la limpieza, pues la presión puede dañar algún

mecanismo y partículas extrañas pueden alojarse dentro de los mismos, impidiendo

en algunos casos el correcto funcionamiento del mismo.




11

• Nunca apoye escaleras contra la Subestación, use bancos de madera robustos

previstos de peldaños y/o escaleras auto soportadas, a fin de alcanzar las partes

altas.


12÷36 kVSYStem6

Medium voltage switchboardQuadro di media tensioneTableau de moyenne tension

Generalities

Employment

Description

Norms and homologations

Electrical features

Typical panels

Complementary tools

Dimensional features, fixing and incoming cables

Generalità

Impiego

Descrizione

Norme e certificati

Caratteristiche elettriche

Pannelli tipici

Accessori complementari

Caratteristiche dimensionali, fissaggio e passaggio cavi

Généralités

Emploi

Description

Normes et certificats

Caractéristiques électriques

Cellules typiques

Outils additionnels

Caractéristiques dimension-nelles, fixage et passage de câbles

02

03

04

07

10

11

17

18in

dex

Pag.

GeneralitiesGeneralitàGénéralités

02

SYStem6 MV switchboard is com-

posed by a standardized, modular

and compact series of protected

and internally arc-proofed panels

metal-enclosed type (LSC2A-PI),

equipped with SF6 insulated on-load

switches and vacuum circuit breakers.

Complex switchboard configurations

can be realized using modular

panels.

Each panel and circuit is equipped

with necessary mechanical interlocks

and visual mimic diagram to ensure

maximum safety of the operator.

Arc-proof execution allows to employ

these panels even in extreme condi-

tions.

Il quadro MT SYStem6 è costituito

da una serie normalizzata, modulare

e compatta di scomparti tipo metal-

enclosed (LSC2A-PI) a prova d’arco

interno, equipaggiati con interruttori

di manovra-sezionatori in SF6, e con

interruttori automatici sottovuoto.

La modularità degli scomparti

permette di realizzare quadri anche

con configurazioni complesse.

Ogni scomparto è corredato di inter-

blocchi meccanici e schema sinottico,

che assicurano operazioni di manovra

in condizioni di assoluta sicurezza.

L’esecuzione a tenuta d’arco interno

ne consente l’impiego in condizioni di

esercizio e sicurezza estreme.

Le tableau de MT SYStem6 est com-

posé par une série de cellules stan-

dards, modulaires et compactes, du

type metal-enclosed (LSC2A-PI) à tenue

à l’arc interne, équipées avec des

interrupteurs en SF6 et disjoncteur

sous vide.

La modularité des cellules permet la

réalisation même des configurations

complexes.

Chaque cellule est équipée avec

des verrouillages mécaniques et un

schéma synoptique qui assurent toute

sécurité de manœuvre.

La tenue à l’arc interne permet

d’employer ces cellules même en

conditions extrêmes.

EmploymentImpiego

Emploi

SYStem6 switchboards are

used in MV secondary power

distribution.

Particularly they can be employed

for protection and control of electric

lines, in transformer substations, in

cogeneration plants, as well as for

photovoltaic plants, etc..

I quadri SYStem6 trovano impiego

nella distribuzione elettrica secondaria

di MT.

In particolare possono essere

impiegati per la protezione e

l’alimentazione di linee elettriche,

nelle cabine di trasformazione, in

impianti di cogenerazione, oltre che

per impianti fotovoltaici, ecc..

Les tableaux SYStem6 sont utilisés

dans la distribution électrique

secondaire de MT.

En particulier peuvent être utilisés

pour le contrôle et la protection des

lignes électriques, dans les postes

de transformation, dans les usines

de cogénération, ainsi que dans les

installation photovoltaïques, etc..

03

04

Bus bars compartmentVano sbarreCompartiment barres

On-load switchInterruttore di manovra-sezionatoreInterrupteur

Auxiliary compartmentCassonetto ausiliarioCoffret auxiliaire

Vacuum circuit breakerInterruttore sottovuotoDisjoncteur sous vide

Main equipments compartmentVano apparecchiature principaliCompartiment équipements principaux

Current/Voltage transformersTrasformatori di corrente/tensioneTransformateurs de courant/tension

Earth switchSezionatore di terra Interrupteur de mise à la terre

1

3

4

2

7

6 5

DescriptionDescrizioneDescription

In the bus bars compartment are placed the three main bus bars of the system. This sector is completely isolated from the main equipment compartment, allowing a total safety access to this one, with main bus bars in tension too, according to the classification LSC2A.

The main bus bars can work to 400-630-1250A.

Nel vano sbarre trovano collocamento le sbarre principali del sistema. Questo vano è completamente separato dal vano apparecchiature principali; ciò permette l’accesso a quest’ultimo in totale sicurezza anche con le sbarre principali in tensione, secondo la classificazione LSC2A.

Le sbarre principali possono avere la portata 400-630-1250A.

Dan les compartiment barres sont colloquées les trois barres princi-pales du système. Ce compartiment barres est complètement séparé du compartiment équipements principaux, cela permet l’accès à ce dernier en totale sûreté même avec les barres principales en tension, selon la classification LSC2A.

Les barres principales peuvent travailler à 400-630-1250.

This compartment is used to set the auxiliary command and control equipments, such as protection relay, control buttons, signaling lamps, terminal boards, etc..

Questo scomparto viene utilizzato per collocare le apparecchiature ausiliarie per il comando e controllo, come relè di protezione, pulsanti di comando, lampade di segnalazione, morsettiere di collegamento, ecc..

Ce compartiment est utilisé pour placer les équipements auxiliaire pour la commande et le contrôle comme le relai de protection, les boutons de commande, les lampes de signalisation, plaques à bornes pour connexion, etc..

The on-load switches IM6 type, with resin envelop, are filled with hexa-fluoride (SF6) as dielectric insulation and interruption. Its position creates a separation between the bus bars compartment and the main equip-ment compartment.

The switch admits three different positions: closed, open and earthed; the lock system prevents any wrong positions.

Gli interruttori di manovra-seziona-tori della serie IM6, con involucro in resina, utilizzano l’esafloruro (SF6) come dielettrico per l’isolamento e l’interruzione. La sua posizione all’interno dello scomparto crea una separazione tra il vano sbarre e il vano apparecchiature principali.L'apparecchio può assumere tre posizioni: aperto, chiuso e messo a terra; un sistema di interblocco previene manovre errate.

Les interrupteurs série IM6, avec enveloppe en résine époxy, utilisent le gaz SF6 comme diélectrique pour l’isolement et l’interruption. Sa posi-tion à l’intérieur de la cellule crée une séparation entre le compar-timent barres et le compartiment équipements principaux.L’appareillage peut avoir trois positions : fermé, ouvert et mise à la terre ; un efficace système de verrouillage prévient les fausses manœuvres.

On-load switchInterruttore di manovra-sezionatore

Interrupteur

1Bus bars compartment

Vano sbarreCompartiment barres

Auxiliary compartmentCassonetto ausiliario

Coffret auxiliaire 2

3

05

They are provided with single primary winding and single or double secondary winding, depending on the required use.

Characteristics in accordance with IEC 60044-1/2 Standards.

Sono provvisti di singolo primario e singolo o doppio secondario, in funzione del tipo di impiego richiesto.

Caratteristiche in accordo con le norme IEC 60044-1/2.

Ils sont pourvus de simples enrou-lement primaire et une ou deux enroulement secondaire, en fonc-tion de l’utilisation souhaitée.

Caractéristiques conformément à des normes IEC 60044-1/2.

4Current/Voltage transformers

Trasformatori di corrente/tensioneTransformateurs de courant/tension

The medium voltage vacuum circuit breakers WL type are manufactured using the separate poles technique.

Each pole contains a vacuum inter-rupter which, thanks to a special production process, is incorporated inside the resin during the mould-ing stage, improving the dielectric strength.

Gli interruttori sottovuoto della serie WL sono realizzati tramite la tecnica di costruzione a poli separati.

All’interno di ogni polo si trova un’ampolla sottovuoto che, grazie ad un particolare processo pro-duttivo, viene racchiusa all’interno della resina direttamente nella fase di stampaggio, migliorandone la tenuta dielettrica.

Les disjoncteurs de moyenne tension sous vide sont réalisés avec une technique de construction à pôles séparés.

A l’intérieur de chaque pole se trouve une ampoule sous vide qui, grâce à un processus productif particulier, est incorporée dans la résine directement dans la phase de moulage, améliorant la tenue diélectrique.

7Vacuum circuit breakerInterruttore sottovuotoDisjoncteur sous vide

The earth switch is mechanically interlocked with the on-load switch.

It ensures the earthing of incoming/outgoing cable allowing the access to the main equipment compartment in complete safety.

Il sezionatore di terra è interblocca-to meccanicamente con l’interrutto-re di manovra-sezionatore.

Garantisce la messa a terra del cavo in arrivo/partenza, permettendo l’accesso allo scomparto appa-recchiature principali in assoluta sicurezza.

Les interrupteurs de mise a la terre est verrouillé mécaniquement à l’interrupteurs.

Il fournit la mise a la terre du câble entrant/sortant, permettant l’accès au compartiment équipements principaux en toute sécurité.

5Earth switchSezionatore di terra Interrupteur de mise à la terre

06

Inside the compartment there are: the automatic switch, the instrument transformers, the earth switch and others equipments, as well as the medium voltage cables for external equipments connection.

Mechanical and key locks ensure that access to the compartment occurs only after completing all necessary safety maneuvers.

All’interno del vano sono alloggiati: l’interruttore automatico, i trasfor-matori di misura, il sezionatore di terra e altre apparecchiature principali, oltre che i cavi di media tensione per il collegamento delle apparecchiature esterne.

Blocchi meccanici e blocchi a chiave garantiscono che l’accesso al vano avvenga solo dopo aver completato le manovre necessarie alla messa in sicurezza.

A l’intérieur du compartiment se trouvent ‘interrupteur automatique, les transformateurs de mesure, le sectionneur de terre et les autres équipements principaux, en plus que les câbles de moyenne tension pour la connexion des appareillages extérieures.

Les verrouillages mécaniques et à clé garantissent que l’accès au compartiment se produit seulement après avoir terminé les manœuvres nécessaires pour les mesures de sécurité.

6Main equipments compartmentVano apparecchiature principaliCompartiment équipements principaux

SYStem6 switchboards have

positively passed all type tests at

official laboratories (CESI), according

to the International Standards IEC,

as well as they have obtained the

peculiar homologations in others

countries.

The quality system

(ISO 9001 – ISO 14000) assures

that the whole production process

maintains an high and steady quality

level.

During the whole cycle of production

each equipment is submitted to

electrical and mechanical tests until

the final test, performed as required

by the IEC Standards.

Standards(IEC) CEI EN-62271-200(IEC) CEI EN-62271-102CEI EN-62271-103CEI 0-16

I quadri SYStem6 hanno

positivamente superato, presso

laboratori ufficiali (CESI), tutte le

prove di tipo, in accordo alle Norme

Internazionali IEC, oltre che aver

ottenuto omologazioni

specifiche di altri paesi.

Il sistema di controllo qualità

(ISO 9001 – ISO 14000) assicura

che l’intero processo di produzione

mantenga un livello qualitativamente

alto e costante.

Durante tutto il ciclo di produzione le

apparecchiature sono sottoposte a

prove meccaniche ed elettriche fino

al collaudo finale, condotto secondo

quanto previsto dalle Normative IEC.

Norme(IEC) CEI EN-62271-200(IEC) CEI EN-62271-102CEI EN-62271-103CEI 0-16

Les tableaux SYStem6 ont positive-

ment passé dans laboratoires offi-

ciels (CESI) non seulement tous les

essais de type en accord aux Normes

Internationales IEC, mais aussi ils ont

obtenu les homologations spécifiques

d’autres pays.

Le système de contrôle qualité

(ISO 9001 – ISO 14000) assure que

tout le procès de production garde

un niveau qualitativement haut et

constant.

Pendant tout le cycle de production

les équipements sont soumis aux es-

sais électriques et mécaniques jusqu’à

l’essai final, réalisé en conformité aux

Normes IEC.

Normes(IEC) CEI EN-62271-200(IEC) CEI EN-62271-102CEI EN-62271-103CEI 0-16


Norme e certificati


07

Technical featuresCaratteristiche tecnicheCaractéristiques techniques

Due to continuous development of

building materials and the updating

of standards, reported data are not

constricting and are subject to our

revision.

Considerando l’evoluzione di

materiali e norme, quanto riportato

nel presente documento si potrà

ritenere impegnativo solo dopo

nostra conferma.

Etant donné l’évolution des matériels

ainsi que des normes, les informations

contenues dans le présent document,

ne seront considérées comme étant

valable qu’après confirmation de

notre part.

SYStem6Rated voltageTensione nominale Tension nominale

kV 12 17.5 24 36

Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50Hz 1Min (kV r.m.s.) Tensione nominale di tenuta alla frequenza di esercizio 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Tension nominale à la fréquence industrielle 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.)

To earth and between phasesVerso massa e tra le fasi Vers la terre et entre les phases

kV

28 38 50 70

Across the isolating distance Sulla distanza di sezionamentoSur la distance de sectionnement

32 45 60 80

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak value) Tensione nominale di tenuta ad impulso atmosferico (valore di picco) Tension nominale de tenue au choc (valeur de crête)


kV

75 95 125 170


85 110 145 195

Rated frequency Frequenza nominaleFréquence nominale

Hz 50-60

Rated current main bus bars up to Corrente nominale sbarre principali fino a Courant nominale barres principales jusqu'à

A 1000

Rated current unit Corrente nominale unità funzionaliCourant nominale unité fonctionelles

A630 1000

4006301000

Short-time withstand currentCorrente di breve durata ammissibileCourant de courte durée admissible

kA16 - 1s 20 - 3s25 - 1s

16 - 1s 20 -1s20 - 2s

Peak valueValore di piccoValeur de crête

kA40 50

62.5

4050

Withstand internal arcTenuta a l'arco internoTenue à l'arc interne

kA 16 - 1s

Protection degree indoor / outdoor Grado di protezione interno / esternoDegré de protection intérieur / extérieur

IP 2X/3X

AltitudeAltitudineHauteur

m ≤1000

Ambient temperatureTemperatura ambiente Température ambiante

°C -5÷40

Electrical features Caratteristiche elettriche Caractéristiques électriques

10

SYStem6 24kV switchboardQuadro SYStem6 24kVTableau SYStem6 24kV

kVmm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l

17.5 l

24 l l

36 l

Dimensions | Dimensioni | Dimensions

ASRS

ATkV

mm.

375 500 750 1100

12

17.5

24 l

36 l

Typical panelsPannelli tipici

Cellules typiques


11

-R

-R

AS Incoming cableRS Bus riser

Basic equipment• Bus bars• Low voltage auxiliary compartment• Cables for riser

Optional accessories• Voltage indicators

AS Arrivée simpleRS Remontée de barres

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires• Câbles pur remontée

Accessories en option• Indicateurs de tension

AS Arrivo sempliceRS Risalita a sbarre

Unità di base• Sistema di sbarre• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari• Cavi per risalita

Accessori a richiesta• Indicatori di presenza tensione

AT Incoming with earth switch

Basic equipment• Bus bars• Earth switch ST6• Voltage indicators• Low voltage auxiliary compartment• Heater resistance with thermostat

Optional accessories• Key locks

AT Arrivée avec sect. de mise la terre

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Sectionneur de mise a le terre ST6• Indicateurs de tension• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires• Résistance de chauffage avec thermostat

Accessories en option• Verrouillages à clé

AT Arrivo con sezionatore di terra

Unità di base• Sistema di sbarre• Sezionatore di terra ST6• Indicatori di presenza tensione • Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato

Accessori a richiesta• Blocchi a chiave

I

TM

kVmm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l

17.5 l

24 l l

36 l

kVmm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l

17.5 l

24 l l

36 l



12

Typical panelsPannelli tipiciCellules typiques

-R

-R

I Incoming or outgoing

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch IM6• KS operating mechanism• Earth switch• Voltage indicators• Low voltage auxiliary compartment• Heater resistance with thermostat

Optional accessories• KP operating mechanism• Tripping coil (KP operating mechanism)• Motor operating mechanism KSM• Auxiliary contacts• Key locks

I Arrivée ou départ

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur IM6• Commande KS• Sectionneur de mise à la terre• Indicateurs de tension• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires• Résistance de chauffage avec thermostat

Accessories en option• Commande KP• Bobine d’ouverture (commande KP)• Commande KSM• Contacts auxiliaires• Verrouillages à clé

I Arrivo o Partenza

Unità di base• Sistema di sbarre• Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6• Comando KS• Sezionatore di terra• Indicatori di presenza tensione• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato

Accessori a richiesta• Comando KP• Sganciatore di apertura (comando KP)• Comando motorizzato KSM• Contatti ausiliari• Blocchi a chiave

TM Feeder with on-load switch-fuse

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch-fuse IM6P-TF• KP operating mechanism• Tripping coil (KP operating mechanism)• Automatic tripping device when fuse blow-up• 3 striker fuses• Earth switch at the top and at the bottom of the fuses • Voltage indicators• Low voltage auxiliary compartment• Heater resistance with thermostat

Optional accessories• KS operating mechanism• Auxiliary contacts• Auxiliary contacts for fuse blow-up• Key locks

TM Départ protection par interrupteur-fusibles combiné

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur-fusible IM6P-TF• Commande KP• Bobine d'ouverture (commande KP)• Dispositif d'ouverture fusion fusible• 3 Fusibles à percuteur• Sectionneur de m.a.t. à mont et à val des fusible• Indicateurs de tension• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires• Résistance de chauffage avec thermostat

Accessories en option• Commande KS• Contacts auxiliaires• Auxiliaire contacts for fuse blow-up• Verrouillages à clé

TM Partenza protezione con sezionatore-fusibili combinato

Unità di base• Sistema di sbarre• Sezionatore-fusibili IM6P-TF• Comando KP• Bobina di apertura (comando KP)• Dispositivo apertura per fusione fusibile• 3 fusibili con percussore• Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dei fusibili• Indicatori di presenza tensione• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato

Accessori a richiesta• Comando KS• Contatti ausiliari• Contatto aux scattato fusibile• Blocchi a chiave

ITD

ITI

kVmm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l

17.5 l

24 l

36

kVmm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l

17.5 l

24 l

36 l


Cellules typiques



13

I>

-R

I>

-R

ITD Départ avec disjoncteur sous vide avec TC et relais autoalimenté

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur IM6-TD• Commande KS• Disjoncteur avec protection intégrée et bobine d'ouverture• 3 transformateurs de courant• Sectionneur de m.a.t. à mont et à val du disjoncteur• Indicateurs de tension• Résistance de chauffage avec thermostat• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires

Accessories en option• Contacts auxiliaires• Verrouillages à clé• Commande motorisée pour disjoncteur

ITD Feeder with vacuum circuit breaker with CT and self powered relay

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch IM6-TD• KS operating mechanism• Automatic circuit breaker with integrated protection and tripping coil• 3 current transformers• Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker • Voltage indicators• Heater resistance with thermostat• Low voltage auxiliary compartment

Optional accessories• Auxiliary contacts• Key locks• Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker

ITD Partenza con interruttore sottovuoto con TA e relè autoalimentato

Equipaggiamento di base• Sistema di sbarre• Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6-TD• Comando KS• Interruttore automatico con protezione integrata e bobina d'apertura• 3 riduttori di corrente• Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dell'interruttore automatico• Indicatori di presenza tensione• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari

Accessori a richiesta• Contatti ausiliari• Blocchi a chiave• Comando a motore per interruttore automatico• Esecuzione conforme CEI 0-16

ITI Feeder with vacuum circuit breaker with CT and indirect relay

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch IM6S-TD• KS operating mechanism• Automatic circuit breaker with tripping coil• Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker • Voltage indicators• 3 current transformers• Microprocessor secondary protection • Heater resistance with thermostat• Low voltage auxiliary compartment

Optional accessories• Auxiliary contacts• Key locks• Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker

ITI Départ avec disjoncteur sous vide avec TC et relais indirect

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur IM6S-TD• Commande KS• Disjoncteur avec bobine d'ouverture• Sectionneur de m.a.t. et a mont et à val du disjoncteur• Indicateurs de tension• 3 transformateurs de courant• Protection secondaire à microprocesseur• Résistance de chauffage avec thermostat• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires

Accessories en option• Contacts auxiliaires• Verrouillages à clé• Commande motorisée pour disjoncteur

ITI Partenza con interruttore sottovuoto con TA e relè indiretto

Equipaggiamento di base• Sistema di sbarre• Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-TD• Comando KS• Interruttore automatico con bobina d'apertura• Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dell'interruttore automatico• Indicatori di presenza tensione• 3 riduttori di corrente• Protezione secondaria a microprocessore• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari

Accessori a richiesta• Contatti ausiliari• Blocchi a chiave• Comando a motore per interruttore automatico• Esecuzione conforme CEI 0-16

ITI2

ITBkV

mm.

375 500 750 1100

12

17.5

24 l

36

kVmm.

375 500 750 1500

12 l

17.5 l

24 l

36 l



14


I>

-R

I>

-R

ITI2 Unit with double switch-disconnector with vacuum circuit breaker, CT and indirect relay

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch IM6S-2• KS operating mechanism• Automatic circuit breaker with tripping coil• Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker• Voltage indicators• 3 current transformers• Microprocessor secondary protection • Heater resistance with thermostat• Low voltage auxiliary compartment

Optional accessories• Auxiliary contacts• Key locks• Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker• 3 voltage transformers

ITI2 Unité double interrupteur avec disjoncteur sous vide, TC et relais indirect

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur IM6S-2• Commande KS• Disjoncteur avec bobine d'ouverture• Sect. de m.a.t. à mont et à val du disjoncteur• Indicateurs de tension• 3 transformateurs de courant• Protection secondaire à microprocesseur• Resistance de chauffage avec thermostat• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires

Accessories en option• Contacts auxiliaires• Verrouillages à clé• Commande motorisée pour disjoncteur • 3 transformateurs de tension

ITB Partenza rovesciata con interruttore sottovuoto, TA e relè indiretto

Unità di base• Sistema di sbarre• Interruttore di manovra sezionatore IM6SC-TD• Comando KS• Interruttore automatico con bobina d'apertura• Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle Int.• Indicatori di presenza tensione• 3 riduttori di corrente• Protezione secondaria a microprocessore• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari

Accessori a richiesta• Contatti ausiliari• Blocchi a chiave• Comando a motore per interruttore automatico• 3 riduttori di tensione• Esecuzione conforme CEI 0-16

ITI2 Unità doppio sezionamento con interruttore sottovuoto, TA e relè indiretto

Unità di base• Sistema di sbarre• Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-2• Comando KS• Interruttore automatico con bobina d'apertura• Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dell'interruttore automatico• Indicatori di presenza tensione• 3 riduttori di corrente• Protezione secondaria a microprocessore• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari

Accessori a richiesta• Contatti ausiliari• Blocchi a chiave• Comando a motore per interruttore automatico • 3 riduttori di tensione

ITB Départ revers avec disjoncteur sous vide, TC et relais indirect

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur IM6SC-TD• Commande KS• Disjoncteur avec bobine d'ouverture• Sect. de m.a.t. à mont et à val du disjoncteur• Indicateurs de tension• 3 transformateurs de courant• Protection secondaire à microprocesseur• Résistance de chauffage avec thermostat• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires

Accessories en option• Contacts auxiliaires• Verrouillages à clé• Commande motorisée pour disjoncteur• 3 transformateurs de tension

ITB Reverse feeder with vacuum circuit breaker, CT and indirect relay

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch IM6SC-TD• KS operating mechanism• Automatic circuit breaker with tripping coil• Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker• Voltage indicators• 3 current transformers• Microprocessor secondary protection • Heater resistance with thermostat• Low voltage auxiliary compartment

Optional accessories• Auxiliary contacts• Key locks• Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker• 3 voltage transformers

MA

MVkV

mm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l l

17.5 l l

24 l

36 l

kVmm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l

17.5 l

24 l

36 l


Cellules typiques



15

-R

-R

MV Mesure avec TC

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur IM6S-TF• Commande KS• 3 socle porte fusibles avec fusibles MT• 3 transformateurs de tension• Resistance de chauffage avec thermostat• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires

Accessories en option• Contacts auxiliaires• Borne d'essai

MV Metering with VT

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch IM6S-F• KS operating mechanism• 3 fuse bases with fuses MV side• 3 voltage transformers• Heater resistance with thermostat• Low voltage auxiliary compartment

Optional accessories• Auxiliary contacts• Terminal set for seal

MA Metering with CT and VT

Basic equipment• Bus bars• 3 voltage transformers• 3 current transformers• Heater resistance with thermostat• Low voltage auxiliary compartment

Optional accessories• Terminal set for seal

MA Mesure avec TC e TT

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• 3 transformateurs de tension• 3 transformateurs de courant• Resistance de chauffage avec thermostat• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires

Accessories en option• Borne d'essai

MV Misure con TV

Equipaggiamento di base• Sistema di sbarre• Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-F• Comando K S• 3 portafusibili completi di fusibili lato MT • 3 riduttori di tensione• Resistenza anticondensa con termostato• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari

Accessori a richiesta• Contatti ausiliari• Morsettiera sigillabile tipo MC3

MA Misure con TA e TV

Equipaggiamento di base• Sistema di sbarre• 3 riduttori di tensione• 3 riduttori di corrente • Resistenza anticondensa con termostato• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari

Accessori a richiesta• Morsettiera sigillabile tipo MC3

MASkV

mm.

375 500 750 1100

12 l

17.5 l

24 l

36


SYStem6 36kV switchboardQuadro SYStem6 36kVTableau SYStem6 36kV

16


-R

MAS Metering with CT, VT and switch

Basic equipment• Bus bars• On-load switch IM6S-TF• KS operating mechanism• 3 fuse bases with fuses MV side• 3 voltage transformers• 3 current transformers• Heater resistance with thermostat• Low voltage auxiliary compartment

Optional accessories• Auxiliary contacts• Terminal set for seal

MAS Mesure avec TC, TT et interrupteur

Equipement de base• Jeu de barres• Interrupteur IM6S-TF• Commande KS• 3 socle porte fusibles avec fusibles MT• 3 transformateurs de tension• 3 transformateurs de courant• Résistance de chauffage avec thermostat• Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires

Accessories en option• Contacts auxiliaires• Borne d'essai

MAS Misure con TA, TV e sezionatore

Unità di base• Sistema di sbarre• Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-TF• Comando KS• 3 portafusibili completi di fusibili lato MT • 3 riduttori di tensione• 3 riduttori di corrente • Resistenza anticondensa con termostato• Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari

Accessori a richiesta• Contatti ausiliari• Morsettiera sigillabile tipo MC3

Baseboard for compartments alignments or incoming cables way

Zoccolo per allineamento scomparti o impiegato come cunicolo cavi

Socle pour l'alignement des compartiments ou utilisés comme un tunnel de câbles

Auxiliary compartment for above incoming cables

Cassonetto arrivo cavi dall’alto

Compartiment pour arrivée des câbles du haut

30

016

00

35

0

Complementary toolsAccessori complementari

Outils additionnels

17

18


Type12 kV 17,5 kV 24 kV

375mm 500mm 750mm 375mm 500mm 750mm 375mm 500mm 750mm

AR-RS 100 100 100 126

AT 151

I 148 148 150 170

TM 160 160 166 188

ITD 280 280 296

ITI 355 355 378

ITB 480

ITI2 440 440 450

MV 190 210 190 210 220

MA 287 287 297

MAS 350 350 360

Panel weight | Pesi dei pannelli | Poids de cellule

The weights are indicated in kg | I pesi sono espressi in kg | Les poids sont indiqués en kg

* Recommended indicative values* Valori indicativi consigliati* Valeurs indicatives recommandées

12-17,5-24 kV

Dimensional features, fixing and incoming cables Caratteristiche dimensionali, fissaggio e passaggio cavi Caractéristiques dimensionnelles, fixage et passage de câbles

kVmm

A B C D

12

375

900 190

187,5

500 250

750 300

17,5

375

900 190

187,5

500 250

750 300

24

375 900 190 187,5

5001000 290

250

750 300

I 0

HD4

A

B

25

02

30

23

0

C

D50

B

66

160

03

00

*

700* 113*

100

210

E = 113, 206, 320

s.r.l.LODI - Italy

A

19

Type36kV

750mm 1100mm 1500mm

AR-RS 225

AT 240

I 305

TM 320

ITI 605

ITI2 910

MV 270

MA 475

Panel weight | Pesi dei pannelli | Poids de cellule

The weights are indicated in kgI pesi sono espressi in kgLes poids sont indiqués en kg

36 kV


kVmm

A

36

750

1100

1500

* Recommended indicative values* Valori indicativi consigliati* Valeurs indicatives recommandées

HD4

I 0

LODI - Italys.r.l.

A

100

1400 B = 113, 206, 320

900* 250*

40

0*

240

22

50

140

0

35

03

50

35

03

50

30

A

420

For energizing the world

Via del Commercio, 12/14 26900, Lodi (LO), Italy

Tel. +39 0371 49061Fax +39 0371 411422

[email protected]

CA

rlO

MA

MEl

i in

dU

STr

iAl

Vid

EO P

rO

dU

CTi

On

rev.

06/

2012

SY

Ste

m6

12

÷3

6k

V

12÷36 kVWL

Medium voltage vacuum circuit breakerInterruttore di media tensione in vuotoDisjoncteur de moyenne tension sous vide

Medium voltage vacuum circuit breakerInterruttore di media tensione in vuotoDisjoncteur de moyenne tension sous vide

12÷36kVWL

02

03

04

05

08

10

11

19in

dex

Pag.

Generalities

Employment

Description

Accessories


Electrical features

Dimensional drawings

Electric circuit diagrams

Generalità

Impiego

Descrizione

Accessori

Norme e certificati

Caratteristiche elettriche

Disegni di ingombro

Schemi elettrici circuitali

Généralités

Emploi

Description

Accessoires


Caractéristiques électriques

Schémas dimensionnels

Schémas électriques des circuits

02

GeneralitiesGeneralitàGénéralités

The WL series of medium voltage vacuum circuit-breakers for indoor installation are realized using the separate pole technique.

Each pole has a vacuum interrupter inside which, thanks to a special production process, is built in the resin directly during the cylinder molding stage. This construction technique ensure protection of the vacuum interrupter against impact, dust and condensation.

The operating mechanism is stored energy type and free unlock system, with opening and closing operations independent from the operator.

Remote control is possible thanks to special electrical accessories (geared motor, shunt opening release, etc.)

The operating mechanism, the three poles and the current sensors (if provided) are mounted on a metallic frame without wheels.The device is particularly compact, sturdy and with very low weight.

This circuit-breakers are “sealed for life” pressure systems (IEC 62271-100 and CEI 71-1 Norms).

Gli interruttori di media tensione sottovuoto per interno serie WL sono realizzati tramite la tecnica di costruzione a poli separati.

All’interno di ogni polo si trova un’ampolla sottovuoto che, grazie ad un particolare processo produttivo, viene racchiusa all’interno della resina direttamente nella fase di stampaggio del cilindro. Questa tecnica di costruzione assicura la protezione dell’ampolla sottovuoto da urti, polvere e condensazione.

Il comando è ad accumulo di energia, a sgancio libero, con chiusura e apertura indipendenti dall’azione dell’operatore.

Tramite l’applicazione di appositi accessori elettrici (motoriduttore, sganciatore di apertura e di chiusura) vi è la possibilità di comandare a distanza l’interruttore.

Il comando, i tre poli e i sensori di corrente (se previsti) sono montati su un telaio metallico senza ruote. Il dispositivo risulta particolarmente compatto, robusto e di peso ridotto.

Questi interruttori sono sistemi a pressione sigillata per la vita operativa (Norme IEC 62271-100 e CEI 71-1).

Les disjoncteurs de moyenne tension sous vide pour intérieur série WL sont réalisés avec une technique de construction à pôles séparés.

Chaque pôle possède à l’intérieur une ampoule sous vide qui, grâce à un processus productif particulier, est incorporée dans la résine directe-ment au cours de la phase de mou-lage du cylindre. Cette technique de construction assure la protection de l’ampoule sous vide contre les chocs, la poussière et les phénomènes de condensation.

La commande est à accumulation d’énergie, à déclenchement libre, et permet les manœuvres d’ouverture et de fermeture indépendamment de l’action de l’opérateur.

Par le biais de l’application de diffé-rents accessoires électriques (moto réducteur, déclencheur d’ouverture et de fermeture), il est possible de commander le disjoncteur à distance.

La commande, les trois pôles et les capteurs de courant (si prévus) sont montés sur un châssis métallique sans roues. La construction est particulièrement compacte, robuste, avec des poids réduits.

Les disjoncteurs sont des systèmes à pression scellée pour toute la vie opérationnelle (Normes IEC 6227-100 et CEI 71-1).

EmploymentImpiego

Emploi

03

The WL series circuit-breakers are used in all applications for medium voltage secondary distribution and in MV/LV transformers substation in factories, workshop in the industrial sector in general, and in the service sector.

With the optional addition of the self-supplied microprocessor-based over current release, WL circuit-breakers are suitable for use in unmanned MV/LV transformer substation and without auxiliary power supply.

Gli interruttori serie WL vengono impiegati in tutte le applicazioni della distribuzione secondaria di media tensione e nelle cabine di trasforma-zione MT/BT di stabilimenti, officine del settore industriale in genere e del terziario.

Con l’applicazione opzionale dello sganciatore di massima corrente a microprocessore autoalimentato, gli interruttori della serie WL sono abili-tati all’impiego in cabine di trasforma-zione MT/BT non presidiate, e prive di alimentazione ausiliaria.

Les disjoncteurs série WL sont utilisés dans toutes les applications de la distribution secondaire de moyenne tension, et dans les cabines de transformation MT/BT des usines, ateliers du secteur industriel en général, et du secteur tertiaire.

Avec l’application facultative du déclencheur de courant maximal à microprocesseur, autoalimenté, les disjoncteurs de la série WL sont convenables pour une utilisation dans les cabines de transformation MT/BT sans opérateur et qui n’ont pas d’alimentation auxiliaire.

04

DescriptionDescrizioneDescription Upper medium voltage terminals

Terminali di media tensione superioriBornes de moyenne tension supérieures

Lower medium voltage terminalsTerminali di media tensione inferioriBornes de moyenne tension inférieures

Springs charging leverLeva carica molleLevier charge ressorts

Operation counterContamanovreCompteur de manœuvres

Key lockBlocco a chiave Verouillages à clé

Feature plate of circuit breakerTarga caratteristiche dell’interruttorePlaque caractéristique du interrupteur

Mechanical signaling device for springs status (charged/discharged)

Segnalatore meccanico stato molle (cariche/scariche)

Indicateur mécanique status ressorts ( chargés/déchargés)

Mechanical signaling device for circuit breaker status (open/close)

Segnalatore meccanico stato interruttore (aperto/chiuso)

Indicateur mécanique status disjoncteur (ouvert/fermé)

Closing buttonPulsante di chiusuraBouton de fermeture

Opening buttonPulsante di aperturaBouton d’ouverture

05

AccessoriesAccessori

Accessoires

Features | Caratteristiche | CaractéristiquesUn 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V --

Un 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 50/60 Hz

Operating limitsLimiti di funzionamentoLimites de fonctionnement

70 ÷ 110% Un

Power consumptionPotenza assorbitaPuissance absorbée

120W dc - 120VA ac

Opening timeTempo di aperturaTemps d'ouverture

40ms

Minimum pulse durationDurata minima impulsoDureé minimale impulsion

100ms

Shunt opening release

Sganciatore di aperturaDéclencheur d'ouverture


Un 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 50/60 Hz


85 ÷ 110% Un

Power consumptionPotenza assorbitaPuissance absorbée

120W dc - 120VA ac

Closing timeTempo di chiusuraTemps de fermeture

55ms

Minimum pulse durationDurata minima impulsoDureé minimale impulsion

100ms

Shunt closing release

Sganciatore di chiusuraDéclencheur de fermeture

06


Un 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 50/60 Hz


opening | apertura | ouverture 35 ÷ 70% Un

closing | chiusura | fermeture 85 ÷ 110% Un

Inrush powerPotenza allo spuntoPuissance d'appel

125W dc - 125VA ac

Inrush timeDurata dello spuntoDureé de l'appel

0,5s

Holding powerPotenza di mantenimentoPuissance de maintien

5W dc - 5VA ac

Opening timeTempo di aperturaTemps d'ouverture

40ms

Undervoltage release Sganciatore di minima tensione Déclencheur de minimum tension


Un 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 50/60 Hz


85 ÷ 110% Un

Inrush powerPotenza allo spuntoPuissance d'appel

100W dc - 100VA ac

Inrush timeDurata dello spuntoDureé de l'appel

0,3s

Rated powerPotenza nominalePuissance nominale

70W dc - 70VA ac

Charging timeTempo di caricaTemps de charge

4 ÷ 5s

Spring charging motor Motore carica molle Moteur charge ressorts

07

Protection relay Relè di protezione

Relais de protection

Current trasformer for protection relay TA per relè di protezione

Transformateurs de courant pour relais de protection

They provide to the relay the current signal to be elaborated, furthermore they provide the necessary energy to power the relay and the shunt opening release. They can have a primary current of 40A, 80A or 250A.

Forniscono al relè il segnale di corrente da elaborare, inoltre forni-scono l’energia necessa-ria per l’alimentazione del relè stesso nonché dello sganciatore di apertura. Possono avere correnti primarie di 40A, 80A oppure 250A.

Ils fournissent au relais le signal de courant à élaboré, ils fournissent en plus l’énergie néces-saire pour alimenter soit le relais même soit le déclencheur d’ouverture. Ils peuvent avoir une courant primaire de 40A, 80A ou 250A.

ThresholdSogliaSeuil

FeaturesCaratteristiche

Caractéristiques

Current regulation

Regolazione corrente

Régulation courant

TimingTemporizzazione

Timing

NotesNoteNote

51

Normal Inverse1 (IEC "A")Normal Inverse2Very Inverse (IEC “B”)Extremely Inverse (IEC “C”)Long Time InverseDefine Time

20 ÷ 200% In in step di 1%

0,01 ÷ 1,00s in step di 0,01s

50 Define Time 100 ÷ 3000% In in step di 100%

Instantaneous IstantaneoInstantané<60ms

51N

Normal Inverse1 (IEC "A")Normal Inverse2Very Inverse (IEC “B”)Extremely Inverse (IEC “C”)Long Time InverseDefine Time

10 ÷ 80% In in step di 1%

0,01 ÷ 1,00s in step di 0,01s

Minimum 20% In on a phase or 10% In on two phases

Minimo 20% In su una fase oppure 10% In su due fasiMinimum 20% In sur une phase ou 10% In sur deux

phases

50N Define Time 100 ÷ 1200% In in step di 100%

Instantaneous IstantaneoInstantané<60ms

08

Norms and homologationsNorme e certificatiNormes et certificats

The WL circuit-breakers comply with the IEC 62271-100, CEI EN 62271-100, CENELEC HD 348 S6, as well as those of the major industrialized countries.

They have undergone the tests below, and ensure service safety and reliability of the equipment in all installations.

Type testsHeating, withstand insulation at industrial frequency and atmospheric impulse, short-time and peakwithstand current, mechanical life, making and breaking capacity of short circuit currents.

Individual testsInsulation with voltage at industrial frequency in the main circuits, insulation of the auxiliary and control circuits, measurement of the main circuit resistance and mechanical and electrical operation.

Gli interruttori WL sono conformi alle norme IEC 62271-100, CEI EN 62271-100, CENELEC HD 348 S6, e a quelle dei principali paesi industriali.

Ogni interruttore viene sottoposto alle prove sotto riportate, e garantisce la sicurezza e l’affidabilità dell’apparec-chiatura in servizio in ogni impianto.

Prove di tipoRiscaldamento, tenuta all’isolamento e frequenza industriale e impulso atmo-sferico, tenuta alla corrente di breve durata e di picco, durata meccanica, potere di stabilimento e di interruzio-ne delle correnti di corto circuito.

Prove individualiIsolamento con tensione a frequenza industriale dei circuiti principali, isola-mento dei circuiti ausiliari e di coman-do, misure della resistenza dei circuiti principali, funzionamento meccanico ed elettrico.

Les disjoncteurs WL sont conformes aux normes IEC 62271-100, CEI EN 62271-100, CENELEC HD 348 S6, et aux normes des principaux pays industriels.

Ils ont été soumis aux essais indiqués ci-après, et garantissent la sécurité et la fiabilité de l’appareillage en service dans toutes les installations.

Essais de typeRéchauffement, tenue à l’isolement à fréquence industrielle et sous choc atmosphérique, tenue au courant de courte durée et de crête, endurance mécanique, pouvoir de fermeture et de coupure des courants de court-circuit.

Essais individuelsIsolement avec la tension à fréquence industrielle des circuits principaux, isolement des circuits auxiliaires et des circuits de commande, mesure de la résistance des circuits principaux, fonctionnement mécanique et électrique.

Due to continuous development of

building materials and the updating

of standards, reported data are not

constricting and are subject to our

revision.

Considerando l’evoluzione di

materiali e norme, quanto riportato

nel presente documento si potrà

ritenere impegnativo solo dopo

nostra conferma.

Etant donné l’évolution des matériels

ainsi que des normes, les informations

contenues dans le présent document,

ne seront considérées comme étant

valable qu’après confirmation de

notre part.

Technical featuresCaratteristiche tecnicheCaractéristiques techniques

Electrical features Caratteristiche elettriche Caractéristiques électriques

10

WLRated voltageTensione nominale Tension nominale

kV 12 24 36

Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50Hz 1Min (kV r.m.s.) Tensione nominale di tenuta alla frequenza di esercizio 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Tension nominale à la fréquence industrielle 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.)


kV

28 50 70


32 60 80

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak value) Tensione nominale di tenuta ad impulso atmosferico (valore di picco) Tension nominale de tenue au choc(valeur de crête)


kV

75 125 170


85 145 195

Rated currentCorrente nominaleCourant nominale

A6301250

630

Short-time withstand currentCorrente di breve durata ammissibileCourant de courte durée admissible

kA - s16 - 3s20 - 3s

20-3s

Peak valueValore di piccoValeur de crête

kA4050

50

Rated short circuit making currentPotere di chiusura nominalePouvoir de fermeture nominale

kA4050

50

Breaking capacityPotere di interruzione Pouvoir de coupure

Rated short circuit breaking currentPotere di interruzione nominalePouvoir de coupure nominale

A

1620

20

Cables-charging breaking currentCavi a vuotoCâbles à vide

31.5

Single capacitor bank breaking current Batteria singola di condensatoriBatterie singulière de condensateurs

400

Back-to-Back capacitor bank breaking currentBatteria multipla di condensatoriBatterie multiple de condensateurs

400

Operating sequenceSequenza operazioniSèquence des opérations

A 0-0,3s-CO-3min-CO

Altitude AltitudineHauteur

m ≤1000

Ambient temperatureTemperatura ambiente Température ambiante

°C -5÷40

WL 24kV medium voltage vacuum circuit breakerInterruttore di media tensione in vuoto WL 24kVDisjoncteur de moyenne tension sous vide WL 24kV

184,5 150

334,5

210 210

47 912,5

3,5

125

377

28

28

N°4 M8

N°2 M10

20

60

5

130,3 183,7

314

108

183,7

190

29

3,5

99 80

323,5 571,5 17,5

1515

149

N°4 6,8

Dimensional drawingsDisegni di ingombro


11

WL12kV

50

5,5

184,5 230

414,5

47 1032,5

3,5

125

56

2

42

42

N°4 M8

N°2 M10

20

60

5

130,3 183,7

314

113

183,7

312

33

8,5

109 84

325 690 17,5

1515

163

N°4 6,8

230 230

69

0,5

12

WL24kV

Dimensional drawingsDisegni di ingombroSchémas dimensionnels

Right side Lato destro Cùtè droit



13



Lato destrocon TA

accorpati

Right side withbuilt in current transformers

Cùtè droitavec transformateurs de courant intègrès

184,5 230

414,5

47 1032,5

3,5

125

56

2

42

42

N°4 M8

N°2 M10

20

60

5

130,3 183,7

314

113

183,7

312

33

8,5

109 84

325 690 17,5

1515

163

N°4 6,8

230 230

69

0,5

158,5

52

,5

WL24kV Left side Lato sinistro Cùtè gauche

60

5

183,7 130,3

314

113

183,7

312

69

0,5

84 109

33

8,5

184,5230

414,5

230 230

471032,5

3,5

125

56

2

690 32517,5

1515

163

N°4 6,8

42

42N°4 M8

N°2 M10

20

14


15



Lato sinistrocon TA

accorpati

Left side withbuilt in current transformers

Cùtè gaucheavec transformateurs de courant intègrès

184,5230

414,5

230 230

471032,5

3,5

125

56

2

60

5

183,7 130,3

314

113

183,7

312

69

0,5

84 109

690 32517,5

1515

163

N°4 6,833

8,5

42

42N°4 M8

N°2 M10

20

52

,5

158,5

Frontal Frontale Frontal

78 230

28

626

27

42

42

N°4 M8

N°2 M10

20

312

358 9,542

53

,13

87,5

167,2 104,8583

85

73

20

0 N°4 10,2

616

230 78

16,5 16,5 9,9

344

24

48

,5

80

238 120

39

0

74

2

16

WL24kV


184,5 350

534,5

47 1415,5

3,5

125

70

1,9

42

42

N°4 M8

N°2 M10

20

60

5

130,3 183,7

314

113

183,7

34

2,9

44

8,5

109 84

358 1040 17,5

1515

163

N°4 6,8

350 350

17

WL36kV



83

0,5

184,5 150

334,5 210 210

47 912,5

3,5

125

377

28

28

N°4 M8

N°2 M1020

42

5

146,7 130,3

277

99

190

29

3,5

130,3

108

334,5 420 158

1515

149

N°4 9

5

805

05

,5

18


WL/t12kV

Configurazionespeciale

rovesciata

Specialreverse

configuration

Configurationspécialerenversé

19

Electric circuit descriptionFig. 1Spring charging motor (see note B)

Fig. 2AShunt closing release, ac power

Fig. 2BShunt closing release, dc power

Fig. 3Undervoltage release

Fig. 4AShunt opening release, ac power (see note A)

Fig. 4BShunt opening release, dc power (see note A)

Fig. 5Shunt opening release for self-powered relay

Fig. 6Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts

Fig. 7 Self-powered relay insertion, 2 resin CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT

Fig. 8ASelf-powered relay insertion, 3 phase toroidal CT

Fig. 8BSelf-powered relay insertion, 3 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT

Fig. 8CSelf-powered relay insertion, 2 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT

Note(A) The circuit for the supervision of shunt opening release must be used only and exclusively for that function.

(B) Check the power supply available on the auxiliary circuit to verify if it is adequate to start several closing spring charging motors simultaneously. In order to prevent excessive absorption the closing springs must be charged manually before energizing the auxiliary circuit, or enter individually the circuit breakers and the relative auxiliary circuits.

Legend

Descrizione circuiti elettriciFig. 1Motore carica molle (vedi nota B)

Fig. 2ASganciatore di chiusura, alimentazione ca

Fig. 2BSganciatore di chiusura, alimentazione cc

Fig. 3Sganciatore di minima tensione

Fig. 4ASganciatore di apertura, alimentazione ca (vedi nota A)

Fig. 4BSganciatore di apertura, alimentazione cc (vedi nota A)

Fig. 5 Sganciatore di apertura per relè autoalimentato

Fig. 6Contatti ausiliari disponibili dell’interruttore

Fig. 7Inserzione relè autoalimentato, 2 TA in resina e 1 toroide omopolare

Fig. 8AInserzione relè autoalimentato, 3 toroidi di fase

Fig. 8BInserzione relè autoalimentato, 3 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare

Fig. 8CInserzione relè autoalimentato, 2 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare

Note(A) Il circuito per il controllo della continuità dell’av-volgimento dello sganciatore di apertura deve essere utilizzato solo ed esclusivamente per tale funzione.

(B) Controllare la potenza disponibile sul circuito au-siliario per verificare la possibilità dell’inserimen-to contemporaneo di più motori carica molle. Per evitare assorbimenti eccessivi è necessario cari-care manualmente le molle prima di alimentare i circuiti ausiliari, oppure inserire singolarmente gli interruttori e i relativi circuiti ausiliari.

Legenda

Description circuits electriquesFig. 1Moteur charge ressorts (voir note B)

Fig. 2ADéclencheur de fermeture, alimentation ca

Fig. 2BDéclencheur de fermeture, alimentation cc

Fig. 3Déclencheur de minimum tension

Fig. 4ADéclencheur d’ouverture, alimentation ca (voir note B)

Fig. 4BDéclencheur d’ouverture, alimentation cc (voir note B)

Fig. 5Déclencheur d’ouverture pour relais autoalimenté

Fig. 6Contacts auxiliaires disponibles du disjoncteur

Fig. 7Insertion relais autoalimenté, 2 TC en résine et 1 tore homopolaire

Fig. 8AInsertion relais autoalimenté, 3 tores de phase

Fig. 8BInsertion relais autoalimenté, 2 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire

Fig. 8CInsertion relais autoalimenté, 2 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire

Note(A) Le circuit pour le réglage de la continuité de l’enroulement de déclencheur d’ouverture doit être utilisé exclusivement pour cette fonction.

(B) Contrôler la puissance disponible sur le circuit auxiliaire pour vérifier la possibilité d'insérer plus des moteurs charge ressort contemporainement. Pour éviter l'absorption excessive est nécessaire charger manuellement les ressorts avant d'alimenter les circuits auxiliaires, ou placer séparément chacun disjoncteur et les relatifs circuits auxiliaires.

Legende-XC

-FCM

-M

-MC

-MU

-M01

-MA

-XA

-FCS

-XU

Customer’s terminal blocks

Limit switch of the spring charging motor

Spring charging motor

Shunt closing release

Undervoltage release

Shunt opening release

Self-powered shunt opening release

Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts

Signalling contacts springs charged/discharged

Signalling contact undervoltage release energized/de-energized

Morsettiera cliente

Contatto di fine corsa motore carica molle di chiusura

Motore carica molle

Sganciatore di chiusura

Sganciatore di minima tensione

Sganciatore di apertura

Sganciatore di apertura autoalimentato

Contatti ausiliari dell’interruttore

Contatti di fine corsa indicazione molle cariche/scariche

Contatto segnalazione bobina di minima tensione eccitata/diseccitata

-XC

-FCM

-M

-MC

-MU

-M01

-MA

-XA

-FCS

-XU

-XC

-FCM

-M

-MC

-MU

-M01

-MA

-XA

-FCS

-XU

Borne de client

Contact de fin de course moteur charge ressorts de fermeture

Moteur charge ressorts

Déclencheur de fermeture

Déclencheur de minimum tension

Déclencheur d'ouverture

Déclencheur d'ouverture autoalimenté

Auxiliaires contacts du disjoncteur

Contacts de fin de course indication ressorts chargés/déchargés

Contact de signalisation déclencheur de minimum tension exités/désexcités

Electric circuit diagramsSchemi elettrici circuitali


20

Represented working conditionsThe diagrams are represented in the following conditions :

• Auxiliary circuits not powered• Circuit breaker in open position• Undervoltage release activate• Shunt opening/closing release not tripped• Closing spring discharged

Condizioni di funzionamento rappresentateGli schemi sono rappresentati nelle seguenti condizioni :

• Circuiti ausiliari non alimentati• Interruttore aperto• Sganciatore di minima tensione attivo• Sganciatori di apertura/chiusura non intervenuti• Molle di chiusura scariche

Conditions d’exploitation representeeLes schémas sont représentée dans les suivantes condition :

• Circuits auxiliaires non alimentés• Disjoncteur ouvert• Déclencheur de minimum tension activé• Déclencheur d’ouverture/fermeture non intervenues• Ressorts de fermeture dechargés

-XC/1 -XC/13

1 13

NC

COM

-FCM

NO

1A

red

-M

blue

2

-XC/2 -XC/14

14 15

-XC/15

NC NO

COM

-FCM

-XC/3

3

11

-XA

22

3B

COM

-FCC

NC NO

3A

AC

+

-MC

4

-XC/4

-XC/3

3

11

-XA

22

3B

COM

-FCC

NC NO

3A

4

-XC/4

-MC

1 2A 2B

SymbolSegno

Symbole


SymbolSegno

Symbole


SymbolSegno

Symbole


Terminal block MorsettoBornes

Spring charge motorMotore caricamolle

Moteur chargeur de ressorts

Make contactContatto di chiusura

Contact de fermeture

Connection of conductors Connessione di conduttori

Raccordement des conducteurs

Operating deviceBobina di comando

Bobine

Break contactContatto di aperturaContact d’ouverture

Position contactContatto di posizioneContact du position

Fast-on connectionConnessione fast-onConnecteur fast-on

Rectifier bridgePonte raddrizzatore

Pont redresseur

M

COM

NONC

Electric circuit diagramsSchemi elettrici circuitali Schémas électriques des circuits

21



Printedcircuitboard

violetred

blue/green

-MU

6

-XC/6 -XC/17 -XC/18

1817

NC NO

-XU

COM

16

-XC/16-XC/5

5

-XC/19 -XC/21 -XC/23 -XC/25 -XC/27 -XC/29 -XC/31

19 21 23 25 27 29 31

31 51 53 71 73 91 93

-XA

32 52 54 72 74 92 94

19A 21A 23A 25A 27A 29A 31A

41 61 63 81 83 101 103

42 62 64 82 84 102 104

-XA

20 22 24 26 28 30 32

-XC/20 -XC/22 -XC/24 -XC/26 -XC/28 -XC/30 -XC/32

-XC/8

8

-M01

AC

7A

23

-XA

7 9

13

-XC/7 -XC/9

-XC/8

8

-M01

7A

23

-XA

7 9

13

-XC/7 -XC/9

-MA

-XC/11

11

10

-XC/10

+

4A 4B3

5 6

22

Electric circuit diagramsSchemi elettrici circuitali Schémas électriques des circuits

7

8A

2 resin CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT2 TA in resina e 1 toroide omopolare2 TC en résine et 1 tore homopolaire

L1 L2 L3P1

P2

s1

s2

P1 s1

s2

P2

-MA

-MA

+MA

IL1

IL3 IN

B1

B2

B3

B4

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

I1

I2

I3

P1

P2

s1

s2

Io1

Io2

C7

C8

C9

ADR14 1S50/50N/51/51N

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A14

A13

A15

A17

A16K3

K2

S3

S2

S1

Fo

r scad

a

Latc

hin

g t

yp

e

co

nta

ct

Io

7

ADR14 1S50/50N/51/51N

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A14

A13

A15

A17

A16K3

K2

S3

S2

S1

Fo

r scad

a

Latc

hin

g t

yp

e

co

nta

ct

I1

I2

I3

Io

L1 L2 L3P1

P2

s1

s2

P1 s1

s2

P2P1 s1

s2

P2

-MA

+MA

IL1

IL2

INX

-MA

IN

IL3

B1

B2

B3

B4

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

3 phase toroidal CT3 toroidi di fase2 tores de phase

Remote Trip77-250Vac/dc

Auxiliaryvoltage77-250Vac/dc

FLAGCOIL

TRIPCOIL



FLAGCOIL

TRIPCOIL

8A

23

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A14

A13

A15

A17

A16

ADR14 1S50/50N/51/51N

K3

K2

S3

S2

S1

Fo

r scad

a

Latc

hin

g t

yp

e

co

nta

ct

I1

I2

I3

Io

B1

B2

B3

B4

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

-MA

+MA

IL1

IL3

IN

IL2

L3L2L1

P1

P2

s1

s2

P1

P2

s1

s2

P1

P2

s1

s2

-MA

s1

s2

P1

P2

Io1

Io2

8B 3 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT3 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare3 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire

2 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT2 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare2 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A14

A13

A15

A17

A16

ADR14 1S50/50N/51/51N

K3

K2

S3

S2

S1

Fo

r scad

a

Latc

hin

g t

yp

e

co

nta

ct

I1

I2

I3

Io

B1

B2

B3

B4

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

L3L2L1

P1

P2

s1

s2

P1

P2

s1

s2

P1

P2

s1

s2

-MA

+MA

IL1

IL3

IN

Io1

Io2

8C

-MA



FLAGCOIL

TRIPCOIL



FLAGCOIL

TRIPCOIL



For energizing the world

Via del Commercio, 12/14 26900, Lodi (LO), Italy

Tel. +39 0371 49061Fax +39 0371 411422

[email protected]

CA

RLO

MA

MEL

I IN

DU

STR

IAL

VID

EO P

RO

DU

CTI

ON

rev.

07/

2012

WL

12

÷3

6k

V

Legenda

1. Controllo campo elettrico

2. Sistema di sbarre

3. Contatto fisso superiore

4. Involucro esterno

5. Contatto fisso di terra

6. Albero di manovra

7. Contatto mobile

8. Contatto fisso inferiore

List:

1. Electric field control

2. Busbar system

3. Upper fixed contact

4. External body

5. Earth fixed contact

6. Operating shaft

7. Mouving contact

8. Lower fixed contact

Liste

1. Dèflecteur de champ électrique

2. Jeu de barres

3. Contact fixe supèrieur

4. Enveloppe exterieure

5. Contact fixe de M.A.T.

6. Arbre de manoeuvre

7. Contact mobile

8. Contact fixe infèrieur

Principio di funzionamento:Gli interruttori di manovra sezionatori della serie IM6 sono costituiti da un involucro in resinaepossidica riempita in SF6 alla pressione di 150kPa assoluti, sigillati per la vita operativa.(Norme IEC 60265-1)All'interno dell'involucro è posizionato un albero isolante sul quale sono assemblati i contattimobili, mentre i contatti fissi sono montati direttamente sull'involucro.Il movimento di rotazione dell'albero è ottenuto attraverso un comando meccanico postosul fronte dello stesso.L'apparecchio può assumere tre posizioni, chiuso, aperto, messo a terra, presentando unnaturale sistema di interblocco che previene manovre errate.

Caratteristiche:Gli interruttori di manovra sezionatori della serie IM6 utilizzano l'esafloruro (SF6) comedielettrico per l'isolamento e l'interruzione.Le parti attive sono installate all'interno di un involucro in resina epossidica rispondentealle normative CEI allegato EE relativo ai sistemi a pressione sigillataLe apparecchiature costituenti la gamma di prodotti isolati in gas SF6 della serieIM6 presentano i seguenti vantaggi:- Vita elettrica elevata - Assenza di manutenzione delle parti attive - Sicurezza di fuzionamento- Livello di sovratensioni limitato

Functioning concept:IM6 switches are made of an epoxy cast resin housing filled with SF6 gas at the pressure of 150kPa abs.,operative life sealed. (Standard IEC 60265-1)The moving contact are fixed on the insulated rotary shaft inside the cast resin body, while thefixed contacts are mounted directly on the cast resin body.The rotary motion of the shaft is made by an operating mechanism placed on the front.The switch has three different positions: closed, open and earthed, which naturally prevent any wrongoperations.

Charateristics:IM6 switches use sulphur hexafluoride gas (SF6) for insulation and breaking.The active parts are placed in an insulating enclosure in accordance with the IEC standards forsealed pressure systems.IM6 products offer remarkable characteristics:- Long service life - Maintenance-free active parts- Operating safety - Very low over-voltage level

Principe de fonctionnement:Les interrupteurs série IM6 sont constitues par une enveloppe moulée en résine époxy, rempli en SF6à la pression de 150kPa absolus, scellé pour la vie opérationnelle. (Normes IEC 60265-1)Les contacts mobiles sont assembles sur un arbre isolant a l’interieur de l'enveloppe, tandis queles contacts fixes sont montés directement sur l'enveloppe.Le mouvement de rotation de l'arbre est obtenu par une commande mécanique placée sur le frontméme de l’arbre.L'appareil peut avoir trois positions: fermé, ouvert et mise à la terre, et il est doté d'un efficacesystème de verrouillage qui prévient les fausses manœuvres.

Caractéristique:Les interrupteurs et sectionneurs IM6 utilisent l'hexafluorure de soufre (SF6) pour l'isolement etla coupure.Les parties actives sont placées dans une enveloppe en matière isolante scellée à vie, répondantaux standards IEC annexe EE pour les systèmes à pression scellée.Les appareils IM6 ont des caractéristiques remarquables: - Longue durèe de vie - Absenced'entretien des parties actives - Sécurité de fonctionnement - Niveau de surtension très faible

Caratteristiche di funzionamentoOperating characteristicsCaracteristiques de fonctionnement

3

Vista interna scomparto equipaggiato con

sezionatore/interruttore in SF6

Medium voltage switchboard equipped with

SF6 on load switch

Tableau de moyenne tension equipè avec interrupteur

en SF6

Impiego EmploymentEmploi

Gli interruttori di manovra-sezionatori della serie IM6 sono impiegati per la realizzazionedel quadro di media tensione tipo System-6 che è costituito da una serie normalizzata,modulare e compatta di scomparti di tipo protetto ed a prova d'arco interno.Con gli scomparti standard è possibile realizzare quadri anche con configurazioni complesse.Ogni scomparto è corredato di interblocchi meccanici a schema sinottico animato, cheassicurano operazioni di manovra in condizioni di assoluta sicurezza.L'esecuzione a tenuta d'arco interno ne consente l'impiego in condizioni d'esercizio esicurezza particolarmente gravose.Norme di riferimento:CEI EN-62271-200 - IEC 62271-200 - DPR 547

The on-load switches of IM6 series are employed the realization of the medium voltage switch-board, System-6 type that is composed by a standarized, modular and compact series of protectedand internally arc-proofed panels.Complex switchboard configurations can be realized using the standard panels.Each panel is equipped with mechanical interlocks and a movable mimic diagram, which grantthe maximum safety of operation.Arc-proof execution allows to employ these panels even in extreme conditions.System-6 switchboard complies to the following Standards:CEI EN-62271-200 - IEC 62271-200 - DPR 547

Les interrupteurs type IM6 sont utilisés pour la production du tableau de moyenne tension typeSystem 6 qui est composè par une série de cellules standards, modulaires et compactes, de type pro-tégé et à tenue à l'arc interne.Les cellules standards peuvent réaliser même des configurations complexes.Chaque cellule est équipée avec des verrouillages mécaniques et d'un schéma synoptique quiassurent toute sécurité de manœuvre.La tenue à l'arc interne permet d'employer ces cellules même en conditions extremes.Le tableu System-6 est conforme aux normes suivantes:CEI EN-62271-200 - IEC 62271-200 - DPR 547

4

Vista interna scomparto equipaggiatocon sezionatore-fusibili IM6P-TFInternal panel view equipped withIM6P-TF switchVue intérieure de la cellule équipée parsectionneur IM6P-TF

Rapporti di prova: Gli apparecchi IM6 hanno positivamente superato in laboratori ufficiali tutte le prove ditipo in accordo alle Norme internazionali IEC e GOST.

Normative:Rispondenza norme:- IEC 62271-102- IEC 62271-105- IEC 265.1

Il sistema di qualità:Il sistema di controllo qualità assicura che l'intero processo di produzione mantenga unlivello qualitativamente alto e costante.Prima della fornitura, ciascun quadro è sottoposto in fabbrica a minuziose prove e controlli,sia di tipo meccanico sia di tipo elettrico, incluse le prove di accettazione previste dallenormative IEC sopracitate.

Test report:IM6 switches have positively passed, in official laboratories, all type tests according to interna-tional Standard IEC and GOST.

Standard:Correspondence standard:- IEC 62271-102- IEC 62271-105- IEC 265.1

Quality system:The control system quality assures that the entire process of production maintains qualitativelyhigh and constant level. Before the supply, every switchboard is subordinate in factory tometiculous tests and controls, mechanical type and electrical worker, included the tests ofpreviewed acceptance from above mentioned Standard IEC.

Rapports d’essai:Les interrupteurs IM6 ont positivement passé, dans les laboratoires officiels, tous les essais detype en accord aux normes internationales CEI et GOST.

Normes:Normes de correspondance : - IEC 62271-102- IEC 62271-105- IEC 265.1

Le système de qualité:Le système de contrôle qualité assure que tout le procès de production garde un niveau qualitati-vement haut et constant.Avant la fourniture chaque tableau est soumis, directement à l'usine, à des essais et des contrôles,soi de type mécanique soi de type électrique, inclus les essais d'acceptation prévues par les nor-mes IEC ci-dessus indiquées.

Certificati CESI e ISOCertificates CESI and ISOCertificats CESI et ISO

5

Tensione nominale

Rated voltage

Tension nominale

Tensione nominale di tenuta alla frequenza

di esercizio 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.)

Rated power-frequency withstand

voltage 50Hz 1Min (kV r.m.s.)

Tension nominale à la frequence industrielle

50Hz 1Min (kV eff.)

Verso massa e tra le fasi

To earth and between phases

Vers la terre et entre pòles

Sulla distanza di sezionamento

Across the isolating distance

Sur la distance de sectionnement

Tensione nominale di tenuta ad impulso

atmosferico (valore di picco)

Rated lightning inpulse withstand voltage

(peak value)

Tension nominale detenue au choc

(kV crête)

Verso massa e tra le fasi

To earth and between phases

Vers la terre et entre pòles

Sulla distanza di sezionamento

Across the isolating distance

Sur la distance de sectionnement

Corrente nominale

Rated current

Courant nominale

Corrente di breve durata ammissibile

Short-time withstand current

Courant de courte durèe admissible

Potere di chiusura

Making capacity

Pouvoir de fermeture

Potere di interruzione

Breaking capacity

Pouvoir de coupure

Carico prevalentemente attivo

Mainly active load

Charge principalment actif

Carico ad anello

Ring charge

Charge de boucle

Trasformatori a vuoto

No load transformers

Transformateurs à vide

Cavi a vuoto

No load cables

Càbles à vide

36

70

80

170

195

400

630

1000

12,5-1s

16-1s

20-1s

20-2s

31,5

50

400

630

400

630

16

25

kV

kV

kV

kV

kV

A

kA

kA

A

A

A

A

12

28

32

75

85

400

630

1000

16-1s

20-1s

20-3s

25-1s

40

62,5

400

630

400

630

16

25

17,5

38

45

95

110

400

630

1000

16-1s

20-1s

20-3s

40

50

400

630

400

630

16

25

24

50

60

125

145

400

630

1000

16-1s

20-1s

20-3s

40

50

400

630

400

630

16

25

Caratteristiche elettricheElectrical characteristicsCaratteristique elecriques

6

Disegno esploso di un apparecchioIM6 12÷24KVExploded drawing of IM6 12÷24KVon-load switchDessin developée de l’interrupeur IM612÷24KV

Disegno esploso di un apparecchioIM6 36kVExploded drawing of IM6 36kV on-loadswitch Dessin developée de l’interrupeur IM6 36kV

Comando KS Comando STANDARD manuale a passaggio punto morto.Interruttore:L'energia necessaria per la manovra è ottenuta comprimendo una molla, con l'aiuto diun'apposita leva, che al passaggio del punto morto provoca la chiusura dell'apparecchio.La rotazione della leva nel senso inverso ricarica la molla e al passaggio del punto mortoprovoca l'apertura. Di conseguenza la velocità della manovra di chiusura ed apertura è indipendente dall'operatore.Sezionatore di terra:La manovra avviene come per il comando dell'interruttore.

KS Operating mechanismSTANDARD manual operating mechanism dead point passing.Line switch:The necessary energy to operate is obtained, using a proper operating lever, compressing a spring,which passing the dead point releases the energy closing the switch.The rotation of the lever in the opposite direction recharges the spring, which repassing the deadpoint releases the energy opening the switch.Consequently the speeds of operations are independentfrom the operator.Earth switch:The operation is the same of the line switch.

Commande KSCommande STANDARD manuelle à passage de point mort. Interrupteur:L'énergie nécessaire pour la manœuvre est obtenue par compression d'une ressort avec unlevier, qui à passage de point mort provoque la fermeture de l'interrupteur.La rotation du levier dans le sens contraire recharge le ressort, qui à passage de point mortprovoque l'ouverture.La vitesse des manœuvres de fermeture et d'ouverture est indépendante de l'opérateur. Sectionneur de M.A.T.:La manoeuvre est executée comme pour l'interrupteur.

KSComando Operating mechanismCommande

7

8

Comando KS-M Comando STANDARD MOTORIZZATO a passaggio punto morto.Interruttore di linea:Il principio di funzionamento è lo stesso del comando manuale KS, ma oltre alla manovramanuale è possibile effettuare la manovra a distanza grazie ad un motore.Il tempo di funzionamento del motore per il cambio di stato è inferiore a 7 secondi.Sezionatore di terra:La manovra è come quella descritta nel comando KS.

KS-M Operating mechanismSTANDARD Motorized operating mechanism dead point passing.Line switch:Functioning concept is the same as the manual KS operating mechanism, it can be operate bothmanually, and remotely by means of a motor.The motor operating time to chance the status of switch is lower than 7 second.Earth switch:The operation is the same as described for KS operating mechanism.

Commande KS-MCommande STANDARD MOTORISEE à passage de point mort.Interrupteur de ligne:Le principe de fonctionnement est le même de la commande KS, mais la manœuvre à distance estpossible par un moteur.Le temps de fonctionnement du moteur pour le changement d'état est inférieur à 7 secondes.Sectionneur de M.A.T.:La manœuvre est la meme décrit pour le commande KS.

KS-MComando Operating mechanismCommande

Comando KPComando con MOLLE PRECARICATE ad aggancio per apertura e chiusura. Interruttore:L'operatore carica manualmente le molle, che accumulano l'energia necessaria pereffettuare la manovra di chiusura e di apertura a mezzo del selettore meccanico o amezzo delle bobine di chiusura ed apertura. L'indicazione di molle cariche è situata sulfronte del comando. Quando il comando è montato su un Interruttore combinato confusibili, l'apertura può avvenire alla fusione anche di un solo fusibileSezionatore di terra:La manovra è come quella descritta per il per il comando KS.

KP Operating mechanismPRECHARGED SPRING operating mechanism with hook to open and close.Line switch:The operator charges manually the springs which store necessary energy for closing and openingwith the mechanical selector or through the tripping and closing coils. Indication of spring chargedis placed on the front of the operating mechanism. When the operating mechanism is installed on theswitch-fuse, the opening can be caused also at the blow up of one single fuse.Earth switch:The operation is the same as described for KS operating mechanism.

Commande KPCommande à RESSORTS PRECHARGEES à accrochage pour ouverture et fermeture.Interrupteur de ligne:L'opérateur charge manuellement les ressorts, qui permet d'accumuler l'énergie nécessaire poureffectuer les manœuvres de fermeture et d'ouverture par un sélecteur mécanique ou par lesbobines de déclenchement et de fermeture.L'indication de ressort chargé est située sur le front de la commande. Si la commande est montée sur un interrupteur-fusibles, l'ouverture peut être exécutée à la fusiond'un seul fusible.Sectionneur de M.A.T.:La manœuvre est la meme décrit pour le commande KS.

KPComando Operating mechanismCommande

9

PosizionePositionDescription

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

DescrizioneDescriptionDescriptionSchema sinottico con segnali incorporatiMimic diagram with incorporated indicatorsSchèma synoptique avec indicateurs incorporèsDispositivo meccanico per blocco portaMechanical device for door lockDispositif mècanique verrouillage porteSegnalazione meccanica molle cariche per chiusuraMechanical indication of springs chargedIndication de ressorts chargèesSegnalazione meccanica intervento fusibileMechanical indication of fuse blow upIndication de fusion fusibleDispositivo per applicazione lucchetto su Linea/TerraDevice for lock installation on Line/EarthDispositif pour application cadenas sur Ligne/TerreBlocchi a chiave Linea (Chiave libera in aperto)Line key interlocks (key free in open position)Verrouillage a clè-Ligne(clè libre en position ouverte)Blocchi a chiave Linea (Chiave libera in chiuso)Line key interlocks (key free in closed position)Verrouillage a clè-Terre(clè libre en position fermèe)Blocchi a chiave Terra (Chiave libera in aperto)Earth key interlocks (key free in open position)Verrouillage a clè-Terre(clè libre en position ouverte)Blocchi a chiave Terra (Chiave libera in chiuso)Earth key interlocks (key free in closed position)Verrouillage a clè-Terre(clè libre en position fermèe)Contatti ausiliari Linea/TerraAuxiliary contacts for Line/EarthContacts auxiliaires Ligne/TerreContatti ausiliari fusione fusibileAuxiliary contacts for fuse blow upContacts auxiliaires fusion fusibleSganciatore di apertura 24/48/110/220 Vca/cc Tripping coil 24/48/110/220 Vac/dc Bobine d'ouverture 24/48/110/220 Vca/ccSganciatore di chiusura 24/48/110/220 Vca/cc Closing coil 24/48/110/220 Vac/dc Bobine de fermeture 24/48/110/220 Vca/ccScatoletta di segnalazione presenza tensioneVoltage indicationIndication de prèsence tensionSelettore 0-1Selector 0-1Selecteur 0-1Morsettiera di connessioneConnection terminal boxBorne de raccordementFusibili di protezione circuito ausiliarioFuses for auxiliary circuit protectionFusible de protection circuit auxiliaireScheda elettromeccanica comando motoreOperating monitor cardFiche du commande moteurMotoriduttore per comando a distanza 24/48/110 Vca/cc - 220 VcaMotoreducer for remote operating mechanism 24/48/110 Vac/dc - 220 VacMotoreductèur pour commande à distance 24/48/110 Vca/cc - 220 Vac

KS

S

S

NP

NP

O

O

O

O

O

O

NP

NP

NP

O

NP

NP

NP

NP

NP

KP

S

S

S

S

O

O

NP

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

NP

NP

NP

NP

NP

KSM

S

S

NP

NP

O

O

O

O

O

O

NP

NP

NP

O

S

S

S

S

S

Tipo - Type - Type

S = di serieS = standard accessoriesS = accessoires standards

NF = non previstoNF = not providedNF = pas prévu

O = opzionaleO = optional accessoriesO = accessoires optionnels

Accessori AccessoriesAccessoires

10

AccessoriAccessoriesAccessoires

11

kV

12

17,5

24

36

A

185,5

185,5

185,5

373,5

B

796

796

796

*(2)

C

230

230

230

*(2)

D

230

230

230

*(2)

E

295

295

295

*(2)

F

20,5

20,5

20,5

*(2)

G

48,5

48,5

48,5

84,5

H

169

169

169

49

L

230

230

230

350

M

249,5

249,5

249,5

349,5

N

83

83

83

83

P

150

150

150

150

Q

468

468

468

328

R

237,3

237,3

237,3

237,3

S

157,7

157,7

157,7

162,7

T

196,2

196,2

196,2

307,7

U

185

185

185

373

(mm)

kV

12

17,5

24

36

A

248

248

248

373,5

B

870

870

870

*(3)

C

230

230

230

*(3)

D

13

13

13

13

E

295

295

295

*(3)

F

37,5

37,5

37,5

*(3)

G

18,5

18,5

18,5

54,5

H

169

169

169

49

L

230

230

230

350

M

249,5

249,5

249,5

349,5

N

83

83

83

83

P

*(1)

*(1)

300

*(3)

Q

718

718

718

912,5

R

237,3

237,3

237,3

237,3

S

157,7

157,7

157,7

162,7

T

196,2

196,2

196,2

307,7

U

185

185

185

373

(mm)

W

*(1)

*(1)

150

150

IM6S

- I

M6P

IM6S

-TD

DimensioniDimensionDimension

12

fissaggio con vite M10x45fixing with screw M 10x45fixsage avec vis M 10x45

divisori capacitivicapacitive dividersdiviseur capacitives

fronte quadrofront pannelfront cellule





kV

12

17,5

24

36

A

185,5

185,5

248

373,5

B

870

870

870

*(3)

C

230

230

230

*(3)

D

13

13

13

13

E

295

295

295

*(3)

F

37,5

37,5

37,5

*(3)

G

18,5

18,5

18,5

54,5

H

169

169

169

49

L

230

230

230

350

M

249,5

249,5

249,5

349,5

N

83

83

83

83

P

*(1)

*(1)

300

*(3)

Q

725

725

725

905

R

237,3

237,3

237,3

237,3

S

157,7

157,7

157,7

162,7

T

196,2

196,2

196,2

307,7

U

175,5

175,5

175,5

373

(mm)

V

292

292

442

534

IM6P

-TF

- IM

6S-T

F

W

*(1)

*(1)

150

150

13

* Nota - Note - NoteQuote fissaggio traversa apparecchio On-load switch cross-brace fixed dimension Dimension de fissage de la traverse du interrupteur

*(2) 36kV - IM6S; IM6P

*(3) 36kV - IM6S-TD; IM6S-TF; IM6P-TF

*(1) 12-17,5kV - IM6S-TD; IM6S-TF; IM6P-TF




kV

24

A

185,5

B

796

C

230

D

230

E

295

F

20,5

G

51,5

H

169

L

230

M

249,5

N

83

P

150

Q

468

R

237,3

S

157,7

T

196,2

U

185

(mm)

kV

24

A

185,5

B

848

C

230

D

230

E

295

F

45,5

G

26,5

H

169

L

230

M

249,5

N

83

P

150

Q

928

R

237,3

S

157,7

T

196,2

U

185

(mm)

W

442

IM6S

- I

M6P

con

cont

rollo

ri di

cam

po -

with

fiel

d co

ntro

l - a

vec

cont

rolle

ur d

e ch

amps

IM6S

-TF

- IM

6P-T

Fco

n co

ntro

llori

di c

ampo

- w

ith fi

eld

cont

rol -

ave

c co

ntro

lleur

de

cham

ps


14







Considerando l’evoluzione di materiali e Norme, quanto riportatonel presente documento si potrà ritenere impegnativo solo doponostra conferma.

Due to continuous development in material and updating of Standards,date reported are not binding and subject to our revision.

Étant donné l’évolution du matériel ainsi que des Normes, les infor-mation contenues dans le présent document, ne seront considéréescomme étant valable qu’après confirmation de notre part.

S_I

M6S

001

rev.

0 L/

Z 1

107

NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

NA60FEEDER PROTECTION RELAY

THE COMPREHENSIVE SOLUTION FOR FEEDERS AND

TRANSFORMERS PROTECTION

ApplicationThe relay type NA60 can be typically used in radial or meshed MV and LV networks as feeder or power trans-former protection:

On radial, ring and parallel feeders of any length in solidly grounded, ungrounded, Petersen coil and/or resis-tance grounded systems.On parallel connected generators and transformer on the same Busbar.

Moreover undervoltage and overvoltage functions are provided as protections or voltage controls.The relay type NA60 can be can be provided with circuits for input phase current suitable for traditional CTs and VTs, or combined ThySensor devices.

—

•

•

50N/51N

49 50/51

74CT

52

74TCS

BF

67N

NA60

59N

67 74VT

5927

Alternative

50N/51N

49 50/51

74CT

BF

67N

59N

67 74VT

5927

I

- Protective & control functions

27 Undervoltage49 Thermal image (for lines and transformers)50/51 Phase overcurrent50N/51N Residual overcurrent59 Overvoltage59N Residual overvoltage67 Phase directional overcurrent67N Ground directional overcurrentBF Circuit breaker failure74CT CTs monitoringMonitoraggio TA di fase74TCS Trip circuit supervision

METERING- IL1..IL3,IE

- Oscillography- Events & Faults log

Control functions COMMUNICATION

- RS232- Modbus RS485- Modbus TCP/IP- IEC 870-5-103/DNP3

2 NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

MeasuresNA60 provides metering values for phase and residual currents, phase and residual voltage, making them available for reading on a display or to communication interfaces.The input signals can be acquired through the traditional CTs and VTs, or through combined sensors ThySensor including cur-rent, voltage measures, standardized lamp voltage presence and isolated in the same component.For residual current measurement (protection 50N/51N and 67N) the installation of a balance current transformer is required, while the residual voltage is derived through vector calculus on the three phase voltages using the sensors ThySensor, or is se-lectable from the above calculation and the broken Delta VT in versions with traditional VT inputs.Input signals are sampled 24 times per period and the RMS value of the fundamental component is measured using the DFT (Dis-crete Fourier Transform) algorithm and digital fi ltering.With DFT the RMS value of 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th harmonic of phase current are also measured.On the basis of the direct measurements, several calculated (min, max, average,...), phase, sequence, power, harmonic, de-mand and energy measures are processed.Measures can be displayed with reference to nominal values or directly expressed in amperes and volts.

Blocking input/outputsOne output blocking circuit and one input blocking circuit are provided.The output blocking circuits of one or several Pro_N relays, shunted together, must be connected to the input blocking cir-cuit of the protection relay, which is installed upstream in the electric plant. The output circuit works as a simple contact, whose condition is detected by the input circuit of the upstream protection relay.Use of suitable pilot wire to fi ber optic converters (BFO) allows to perform fast and reliable accelerated logic selectivity on ra-dial and closed ring networks.

Output relaysSix output relays are available (two changeover, three make and one break contacts); each relay may be individually programmed as normal state (normally energized, de-energized or pulse) and reset mode (manual or automatic).A programmable timer is provided for each relay (minimum pulse width). The user may program the function of each relay according to a matrix (tripping matrix) structure.

CommunicationMultiple communication interfaces are implemented:

One RS232 local communication front-end interface for com-munication with ThySetter setup software.Two back-end interfaces for communication with remote mon-itoring and control systems by:- RS485 port using ModBus® RTU, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.- Ethernet port (RJ45 or optical fi ber) using ModBus/TCP pro-tocol.

—

—

—

—

•

•

InsulatorThySensor

Voltage divider forvoltage-detector lamps

CT

VT

Measuring inputs with traditional CTs and VTsThree phase current inputs and one residual current input, with nominal currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches.Three phase voltage inputs with programmable nominal volt-ages within range 50...130 V (UR =100 V) or 200...520 V (UR =400 V) and one residual voltage input, with programmable nominal voltage within range 50...130 V (UER =100 V).

Measuring inputs with ThySensor devicesThree phase current inputs, with 630 A nominal current (pri-mary).One residual current input, with nominal currents indepen-dently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches.Three phase voltage inputs with nominal voltage 20/√3 kV (pri-mary); the residual voltage has been obtained by vector calcu-lation measures of phase voltages

Firmware updatingThe use of fl ash memory units allows on-site fi rmware updating.

ConstructionAccording to the hardware confi gurations, the NA60 protec-tion relay can be shipped in various case styles suitable for the required mounting options (fl ush, projecting mounting, rack or with separate operator panel) and with connections to input sig-nals suitable for traditional VTs and CTs ( screw terminals) or combined sensors ThySensor (RJ45 connectors for connecting embedded cables)

Modular designIn order to extend I/O capability, the NA60 hardware can be cus-tomized through external auxiliary modules:

MRI - Output relays and LEDsMID16 - Binary inputsMCI - 4...20 mA converterMPT - Pt100 probe inputs.

Binary inputsTwo binary inputs are available with programmable active state (active-ON/active-OFF) and programmable timer (active to OFF/ON or ON/OFF transitions).Several presettable functions can be associated to each input.

—•

•

—•

•

•

—

—

—

••••

—

3NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

MMI (Man Machine Interface)The user interface comprises a membrane keyboard, a backlight LCD alphanumeric display and eight LEDs.The green ON LED indicates auxiliary power supply and self di-agnostics, two LEDs are dedicated to the Start and Trip (yellow for Start, red for Trip) and fi ve red LEDs are user assignable.

Control and monitoringSeveral predefi ned functions are implemented:

Activation of two set point profi lesPhase CTs and VTs monitoring (74CT and 74VT)Logic selectivityCold load pickup (CLP) with block or setting changeTrip circuit supervision (74TCS)Second harmonic restraint (inrush)Remote trippingCircuit Breaker commands and diagnostic

User defi ned logic may be customized according to IEC 61131-3 standard protocol (PLC).

Circuit Breaker commands and diagnosticSeveral diagnostic, monitoring and control functions are provided:

Health thresholds can be set; when the accumulated duty (ΣI or ΣI2t), the number of operations or the opening time ex-ceeds the threshold an alarm is activated.Breaker failure (BF); breaker status is monitored by means 52a-52b and/or through line current measurements.Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS).Breaker control; opening and closing commands can be car-ried out locally or remotely.

Cold Load Pickup (CLP)The Cold Load Pickup feature can operate in two following modes:

Each protective element can be blocked for a adjustable time.Each threshold can be increased for a programmable time.

It is triggered by the circuit breaker closing.

Second harmonic restraintTo prevent unwanted tripping of the protective functions on transformer inrush current, the protective elements can be blocked when the ratio between the second harmonic current and the relative fundamental current is larger than a user pro-grammable threshold.The function can be programmed to switch an output relay so as to cause a blocking protection relays lacking in second har-monic restraint.

Logic selectivityWith the aim of providing a fast selective protection system some protective functions may be blocked (pilot wire accelerat-ed logic). To guarantee maximum fail-safety, the relay performs a run time monitoring for pilot wire continuity and pilot wire short-ing. Exactly the output blocking circuit periodically produces a pulse, having a small enough width in order to be ignored as an effective blocking signal by the input blocking circuit of the up-wards protection, but suitable to prove the continuity of the pilot wire. Furthermore a permanent activation (or better, with a dura-tion longer than a preset time) of the blocking signal is identifi ed,

—

—

••••••••

•

•

••

••

as a warning for a possible short circuit in the pilot wire or in the output circuit of the downstream protection.The logic selectivity function can be realized through any com-bination of binary inputs, output relays and/or committed pilot wires circuits.

Self diagnosticsAll hardware and software functions are repeatedly checked and any anomalies reported via display messages, communica-tion interfaces, LEDs and output relays. Anomalies may refer to:

Hw faults (auxiliary power supply, output relay coil interrup-tions, MMI board...).Sw faults (boot and run time tests for data base, EEPROM memory checksum failure, data BUS,...).Pilot wire faults (break or short in the wire).Circuit breaker faults.

Event storageSeveral useful data are stored for diagnostic purpose; the events are stored into a non volatile memory.They are graded from the newest to the older after the “Events reading”command (ThySetter) is issued:

Sequence of Event Recorder (SER).The event recorder runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last three hundred events upon trigger of binary in-put/output.Sequence of Fault Recorder (SFR).The fault recorder runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last twenty faults upon trigger of binary input/output and/or element pickup (start-trip).Settings recordingFollowing some setting changes the last eight changes are re-corded in circular mode (Data Logger CEI 0-16)Trip counters.

Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography) [1]

Upon trigger of tripping/starting of each function or external sig-nals, the relay records in COMTRADE format:

Oscillography with instantaneous values for transient analysis.RMS values for long time periods analysis.Logic states (binary inputs and output relays).

Note - A license for Digital Fault Recorder function is required, for purchase procedure please contact Thytronic.

The records are stored in nonvolatile memory

Programming and settingsAll relay programming and adjustment operations may be per-formed through MMI (Keyboard and display) or using a Personal Computer with the aid of the ThySetter software.The same PC setup software is required to set, monitor and con-fi gure all Pro_N devices.Two session level (User or Administrator) with password for sen-sible data access are provided.

—

•

•

••

—

•

•

•

•

—

•••

—

ThySetter

4 NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

S P E C I F I C A T I O N SGENERAL

Mechanical dataMounting: fl ush, projecting, rack or separated operator panelMass (fl ush mounting case) 2.0 kg Insulation testsReference standards EN 60255-5High voltage test 50Hz 2 kV 60 sImpulse voltage withstand (1.2/50 μs) 5 kVInsulation resistance >100 MΩ Voltage dip and interruptionReference standards EN 61000-4-29 EMC tests for interference immunity1 MHz damped oscillatory wave EN 60255-22-1 1 kV-2.5 kVElectrostatic discharge EN 60255-22-2 8 kVFast transient burst (5/50 ns) EN 60255-22-4 4 kVConducted radio-frequency fi elds EN 60255-22-6 10 VRadiated radio-frequency fi elds EN 60255-4-3 10 V/mHigh energy pulse EN 61000-4-5 2 kVMagnetic fi eld 50 Hz EN 61000-4-8 1 kA/mDamped oscillatory wave EN 61000-4-12 2.5 kVRing wave EN 61000-4-12 2 kVConducted common mode (0...150 kHz) EN 61000-4-16 10 V

EmissionReference standards EN 61000-6-4 (ex EN 50081-2)Conducted emission 0.15...30 MHz Class ARadiated emission 30...1000 MHz Class A Climatic testsReference standards IEC 60068-x, ENEL R CLI 01, CEI 50 Mechanical testsReference standards EN 60255-21-1, 21-2, 21-3

Safety requirementsReference standards EN 61010-1Pollution degree 3Reference voltage 250 VOvervoltage IIIPulse voltage 5 kVReference standards EN 60529Protection degree:

Front side IP52Rear side, connection terminals IP20

Environmental conditions Ambient temperature -25...+70 °CStorage temperature -40...+85 °CRelative humidity 10...95 %Atmospheric pressure 70...110 kPa

CertificationsProduct standard for measuring relays EN 50263CE conformity

EMC Directive 89/336/EECLow Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC

Type tests IEC 60255-6

COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

Local PC RS232 19200 bpsNetwork:

RS485 1200...57600 bpsEthernet 100BaseT 100 Mbps

Protocol ModBus® RTU/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3, TCP/IP

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

••

—

—

••

••

INPUT CIRCUITS

Auxiliary power supply UauxNominal value (range) 24...48 Vac/dc, 115...230 Vac/110...220 VdcOperative range (each one of the above nominal values) 19...60 Vac/dc - 85...265 Vac/75...300 VdcPower consumption:

Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet TX) 10 W (20 VA)Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet FX) 15 W (25 VA)

Phase current inputs with traditional CTs

Nominal current In 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP SwitchesPermanent overload 25 AThermal overload (1 s) 500 ARated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.002 VA (In = 1 A)

≤ 0.04 VA (In = 5 A)Connections M4 terminals

Residual current inputNominal current IEn 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP SwitchPermanent overload 25 AThermal overload (1 s) 500 ARated consumption ≤ 0.006 VA (IEn = 1 A), ≤ 0.012 VA (IEn = 5 A)

Voltage inputs with traditional VTsReference voltage UR 100 V or 400 V selectable on orderNominal voltage Un 50...130 V or 200...520 V adjustable via swPermanent overload / 1s overload 1.3 UR / 2 URRated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.5 VA Residual voltage input with traditional VTsReference voltage UER 100 VNominal voltage UEn 50...130 V adjustable via swPermanent overload / 1s overload 1.3 UER / 2 UERRated consumption ≤ 0.5 VA

Phase inputs with ThySensorsSecondary voltage (Inp = 630 A) 200 mVSecondary voltage (Unp = 20/√3 kV) 1.0 VConnections RJ45 clamp

ThySensors primary inputsPrimary nominal current Inp 630 AExtended primary current 50 A...1250 APermanent thermal nominal current 1.2 Inp Max primary current 22.5 kAThermal overload (3 s) 16 kADynamic overload (half cycle) 40 kAPrimary nominal voltage Unp 20/√3 kVPermanent overload factor 1.8

Binary inputsQuantity and type 2 dry inputsMax permissible voltage 19...265 Vac/19...300 VdcMax consumption, energized 3 mA

Block input (Logic selectivity)Quantity and type 1 powered by internal isolated supply Max consumption, energized 5 mA

OUTPUT CIRCUITS

Output relays K1...K6 Quantity 6

Type of contacts K1, K2 changeover (SPDT, type C) Type of contacts K3, K4, K5 make (SPST-NO, type A)Type of contacts K6 break (SPST-NC, type B)

Nominal current 8 ANominal voltage/max switching voltage 250 Vac/400 VacBreaking capacity:

Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) 50 WAlternating current (λ = 0,4) 1250 VA

Make 1000 W/VAShort duration current (0,5 s) 30 A

—

••

—••••

•

—••••

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

•••

••

5NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

Block output (Logic selectivity)Quantity 1Type optocoupler

LEDsQuantity 8

ON/fail (green) 1Start (yellow) 1Trip (red) 1Allocatable (red) 5

GENERAL SETTINGS

Rated values (traditional CTs an VTs versions)Relay nominal frequency (f n) 50, 60 HzRelay phase nominal current (In) 1 A, 5 APhase CT nominal primary current (Inp) 1 A...10 kARelay residual nominal current (IEn) 1 A, 5 AResidual CT nominal primary current (IEnp) 1 A...10 kARelay nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Un) 50...130 V or 200...520 VRelay nominal voltage (phase-to-ground) En= Un/√3 Line VT primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Unp) 50 V..500 kVRelay residual nominal voltage (direct measure) (UEn) 50...130 VResidual primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) · √3 (UEnp) 50 V...500 kVRated values (ThySensor input versions)Relay nominal frequency (f n) 50, 60 HzPhase CT nominal primary current (Inp)[1] 1 A...10 kARelay residual nominal current (IEn) 1 A, 5 AResidual CT nominal primary current (IEnp) 1 A...10 kARelay nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Un) 50...130 V or 200...520 VRelay nominal voltage (phase-to-ground) En= Un/√3 Line VT primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Unp) 50 V..500 kVRelay residual nominal voltage (calculated) UECN = Un · √3 = 3 · En

Note [1] - It represents the reference value to which they are expressed all the settings and corresponds to the rated primary current sensors

Binary input timersON delay time (IN1 tON, IN2 tON) 0.00...100.0 sOFF delay time (IN1 tOFF, IN2 tOFF) 0.00...100.0 sLogic Active-ON/Active-OFF

Relay output timersMinimum pulse width (tTR) 0.000...0.500 s

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Base current IB (traditional CTs versions)Base current (IB) 0.10...2.50 In

Note - The base current IB represents the rated current of the component of the protected (line, transformer ,...), expressed in relation to the CT rated current. Since usually the secondary current rating of the line CT coincides with the current rating of the relay, the IB value must be set to the ratio of the nominal current of the protected equipment and the CT primary rated current.

Base current IB (ThySensor versions)Base current (IB) 0.10...2.50 In

Note - The base current IB represents the rated current of the component of the protected (line, transformer ,...), expressed in relation to the CT rated current. The IB value must be set to the ratio of the nominal current of the protected equipment and the ThySensor primary current (630 A).

Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26Alarm

Alarm threshold θALx (x=1...8) 0...200 °COperating time tθALx (x=1...8) 0....100 s

TripTrip threshold θ>x (x=1...8) 0...200 °COperating time tθ>x (x=1...8) 0....100 s

Note: The element becomes available when the MPT module is enabled and connected to Thybus

—

••••

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

••

••

Undervoltage - 27Common confi guration:

Voltage measurement type for 27 (U type27) [1] Uph-ph/Uph-n27 Operating logic (Logic27) AND/OR

U< ElementU< Curve type (U<Curve) DEFINITE, INVERSE [2]

Defi nite time27 First threshold defi nite time (U<def) 0.05...1.10 Un/EnU<def Operating time (tU<def) 0.03...100.0 s

Inverse time27 First threshold inverse time (U<inv) 0.05...1.10 Un/EnU<inv Operating time (tU<inv) 0.10...100.0 s

U<< Element Defi nite time

27 Second threshold defi nite time (U<<def) 0.05...1.10 Un/EnU<<def Operating time (tU<<def) 0.03...100.0 s

Note [1] - With Uph-ph setting all threshold are in p.u. Un With Uph-n setting all threshold are in p.u. En

Note [2] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.75 ∙ tU<inv / [1 - (U/U<inv)], where: t = trip time (in seconds) tU<inv = operating time setting (in seconds) U = input voltage U<inv = threshold setting

Thermal image - 49Common confi guration:

Initial thermal image ΔθIN (DthIN) 0.0...1.0 ΔθBReduction factor at inrush (KINR) 1.0...3.0Thermal time constant τ (T ) 1...200 minDthCLP Activation time (tDthCLP) 0.00...100.0 s

DthAL1 Element49 First alarm threshold ΔθAL1 (DthAL1) 0.3...1.0 ΔθB

DthAL2 Element49 Second alarm threshold ΔθAL2 (DthAL2) 0.5...1.2 ΔθB

Dth> Element49 Trip threshold Δθ (Dth>) 1.100...1.300 ΔθB

Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (traditional CTs versions)I> Element

I> Curve type (I>Curve) DEFINITE IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM

ICLP> Activation time (tCLP>) 0.00...100.0 sI> Reset time delay (t>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50/51 First threshold defi nite time (I>def) 0.100...40.0 InI>def within CLP (ICLP>def) 0.100...40.0 InI>def Operating time (t>def) 0.04...200 s

Inverse time50/51 First threshold inverse time (I>inv) 0.100...20.00 InI>inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 InI>inv Operating time (t>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

I>> ElementType characteristic DEFINITE or I2tICLP>> Activation time (tCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 sI>> Reset time delay (t>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50/51 Second threshold defi nite time (I>>def) 0.100...40.0 InI>>def within CLP (ICLP>>def) 0.100...40.0 InI>>def Operating time (t>>def) 0.03...10.00 s

Inverse time50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I>>inv) 0.100...20.00 InI>>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) 0.100...20.00 InI>>inv Operating time (t>>inv) 0.02...10.00 s

I>>> ElementICLP>>> Activation time (tCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 sI>>> Reset time delay (t>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50/51 Third threshold defi nite time (I>>>def) 0.100...40.0 InI>>>def within CLP (ICLP>>>def) 0.100...40.0 InI>>>def Operating time (t>>>def) 0.03...10.00 s

—

••

•

••

••

••

—

••••

•

•

•

—

•

••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

••

•••

6 NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (ThySensor versions)I> Element

I> Curve type (I>Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI,, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM

ICLP> Activation time (tCLP>) 0.00...100.0 sI> Reset time delay (t>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50/51 First threshold defi nite time (I>def) 0.010...30.0 InI>def within CLP (ICLP>def) 0.010...30.0 InI>def Operating time (t>def) 0.04...200 s

Inverse time50/51 First threshold inverse time (I>inv) 0.010...20.00 InI>inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.010...20.00 InI>inv Operating time (t>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

I>> ElementType characteristic DEFINITE or I2tICLP>> Activation time (tCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 sI>> Reset time delay (t>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50/51 Second threshold defi nite time (I>>def) 0.010...30.0 InI>>def within CLP (ICLP>>def) 0.010...30.0 InI>>def Operating time (t>>def) 0.03...10.00 s

Inverse time50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I>>inv) 0.010...20.00 InI>>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) 0.010...20.00 InI>>inv Operating time (t>>inv) 0.02...10.00 s

I>>> ElementICLP>>> Activation time (tCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 sI>>> Reset time delay (t>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50/51 Third threshold defi nite time (I>>>def) 0.010...30.0 InI>>>def within CLP (ICLP>>>def) 0.010...30.0 InI>>>def Operating time (t>>>def) 0.03...10.00 s

Residual overcurrent - 50N/51NIE> Element

IE> Curve type (IE>Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM

IECLP> Activation time (tECLP>) 0.00...100.0 sIE> Reset time delay (tE>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50N/51N First threshold defi nite time (IE>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIE>def within CLP (IECLP>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIE>def Operating time (tE>def) 0.04...200 s

Inverse time50N/51N First threshold inverse time (IE>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEnIE>inv within CLP (IECLP>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEnIE>inv Operating time (tE>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

IE>> ElementIECLP>> Activation time (tECLP>>) 0.00...100.0 sIE>> Reset time delay (tE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50N/51N Second threshold defi nite time (IE>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIE>>def within CLP (IECLP>>def) 0.02...10.00 IEnIE>>def Operating time (tE>>def) 0.03...10.00 s

IE>>> Element

IECLP>>> Activation time (tECLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIECLP>>> Reset time delay (tE>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time50N/51N Third threshold defi nite time (IE>>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIECLP>>>def within CLP (IECLP>>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIECLP>>>def Operating time (tE>>>def) 0.03...10.00 s

Overvoltage - 59Common confi guration:

Voltage measurement type for 59 (U type59) [1] Uph-ph/Uph-n59 Operating logic (Logic59) AND/OR

U> ElementU> Curve type (U>Curve) DEFINITE, INVERSE [2]

Defi nite time59 First threshold defi nite time (U>def) 0.50...1.50 Un/EnU>def Operating time (tU>def) 0.03...100.0 s

—

•

••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

••

•••

—

•

••

•••

•••

••

•••

••

•••

—

••

•

••

Inverse time59 First threshold inverse time (U>inv) 0.50...1.50 Un/EnU>inv Operating time (tU>inv) 0.10...100.0 s

U>> Element Defi nite time

59 Second threshold defi nite time (U>>def) 0.50...1.50 Un/EnU>>def Operating time (tU>>def) 0.03...100.0 s

Note [1] - With Uph-ph setting all threshold are in p.u. Un With Uph-n setting all threshold are in p.u. En

Note [2] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.5 ∙ tU>inv / [(U/U>inv)-1], where: t = trip time (in seconds) tU>inv = operating time setting (in seconds) U = input voltage U>inv = threshold setting

Residual overvoltage - 59N (traditional VTs versions)Common confi guration:

Residual voltage measurement for 59N- direct/calc. UE /UEC59N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint59N) OFF/Block59N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText59N) OFF/Block

UE> ElementUE> Curve type (UE>Curve) DEFINITE, INVERSE [1]

UE> Reset time delay (tUE>RES) 0.00...100.0 sDefi nite time

59N First threshold defi nite time (UE>def) 0.01...0.70 UEnUE>def Operating time (tUE>def) 0.07...100.0 s

Inverse time59N First threshold inverse time (UE>inv) 0.01...0.50 UEnUE>inv Operating time (tUE>inv) 0.10...100.0 s

UE>> ElementUE>> Reset time delay (tUE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s59N Second threshold defi nite time (UE>>def) 0.01...0.70 UEnUE>>def Operating time (tUE>>def) 0.07...100.0 s

Note [1] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.5 ∙ tUE>inv / [(UE/UE>inv)-1 where: t = trip time (in seconds) tUE>inv = operating time setting (in seconds) UE = residual input voltage UE>inv = threshold setting

Residual overvoltage - 59N (ThySensor versions)Common confi guration:

Residual voltage measurement for 59N- calculated UEC59N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint59N) OFF/Block59N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText59N) OFF/Block

UE> ElementUE> Curve type (UE>Curve) DEFINITE, INVERSE [1]

UE> Reset time delay (tUE>RES) 0.00...100.0 sDefi nite time

59N First threshold defi nite time (UE>def) 0.01...0.70 UEnUE>def Operating time (tUE>def) 0.07...100.0 s

Inverse time59N First threshold inverse time (UE>inv) 0.01...0.50 UEnUE>inv Operating time (tUE>inv) 0.10...100.0 s

UE>> ElementUE>> Reset time delay (tUE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s59N Second threshold defi nite time (UE>>def) 0.01...0.70 UEnUE>>def Operating time (tUE>>def) 0.07...100.0 s

Note [1] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.5 ∙ tUE>inv / [(UEC/UE>inv)-1 where: t = trip time (in seconds) tUE>inv = operating time setting (in seconds) UEC = residual input voltage (calculated) UE>inv = threshold setting

Phase directional overcurrent - 67 (CTs and VTs versions)Common confi guration:

67 Operating mode (Mode67 ) I /I ∙cos67 Operating logic (Logic67) 1/3 / 2/367 Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67 )

OFF/Block/Not directional67 Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67 )

OFF/Block/Not directional

••

••

—

•••

••

••

••

•••

—

•••

••

••

••

•••

—

•••

•

7NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

IPD> ElementIPD> Curve type (IPD>Curve) DEFINITE,

IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EMIPDCLP> Activation time (tPDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD> Reset time delay (tPD>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 First threshold defi nite time (IPD>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>def) 0...359°IPD>def within CLP (IPDCLP>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>def Operating time (tPD>def) 0.05...200 s

Inverse time67 First threshold inverse time (IPD>inv) 0.100...10.0 InIPD>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>inv) 0...359°IPD>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>inv) 0.100...10.0 InIPD>inv Operating time (tPD>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

IPD>> ElementIPD> Curve type (IPD>>Curve) DEFINITE,

IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EMIPDCLP>> Activation time (tPDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD>> Reset time delay (tPD>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 Second threshold defi nite time (IPD>>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>def) 0...359°IPD>>def within CLP (IPDCLP>>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>>def Operating time (tPD>>def) 0.04...200 s

Inverse time67 Second threshold inverse time (IPD>>inv) 0.100...10.0 InIPD>>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>inv) 0...359°IPD>>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>>inv) 0.100...10.0 InIPD>>inv Operating time (tPD>>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

IPD>>> ElementIPDCLP>>> Activation time (tPDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD>>> Reset time delay (tPD>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 Third threshold defi nite time (IPD>>>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>>>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>def) 0...359°IPD>>>def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>>>def Operating time (tPD>>>def) 0.04...10.00 s

IPD>>>> ElementIPDCLP>>>> Activation time (tPDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD>>>> Reset time delay (tPD>>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 Fourth threshold defi nite time (IPD>>>>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>>>>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>>def) 0...359°IPD>>>>def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>>def) 0.100...40.0 InIPD>>>>def Operating time (tPD>>>>def) 0.04...10.00 s

Phase directional overcurrent - 67 (ThySensor versions)Common confi guration:

67 Operating mode (Mode67 ) I /I ∙cos67 Operating logic (Logic67) 1/3 / 2/367 Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67 )

OFF/Block/Not directional67 Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67 )

OFF/Block/Not directional

IPD> ElementIPD> Curve type (IPD>Curve) DEFINITE,

IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM

IPDCLP> Activation time (tPDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD> Reset time delay (tPD>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 First threshold defi nite time (IPD>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>def) 0...359°IPD>def within CLP (IPDCLP>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>def Operating time (tPD>def) 0.05...200 s

Inverse time67 First threshold inverse time (IPD>inv) 0.010...10.00 InIPD>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>inv) 0...359°IPD>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>inv) 0.010...10.00 InIPD>inv Operating time (tPD>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

•

••

••••

••••

•

••

••••

••••

••

••••

••

••••

—

•••

•

•

••

••••

••••

IPD>> ElementIPD> Curve type (IPD>>Curve) DEFINITE,

IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI RECTIFIER, I2t or EM

IPDCLP>> Activation time (tPDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD>> Reset time delay (tPD>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 Second threshold defi nite time (IPD>>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>def) 0...359°IPD>>def within CLP (IPDCLP>>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>>def Operating time (tPD>>def) 0.04...200 s

Inverse time67 Second threshold inverse time (IPD>>inv) 0.010...10.00 InIPD>>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>inv) 0...359°IPD>>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>>inv) 0.010...10.00 InIPD>>inv Operating time (tPD>>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

IPD>>> ElementIPDCLP>>> Activation time (tPDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD>>> Reset time delay (tPD>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 Third threshold defi nite time (IPD>>>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>>>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>def) 0...359°IPD>>>def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>>>def Operating time (tPD>>>def) 0.04...10.00 s

IPD>>>> ElementIPDCLP>>>> Activation time (tPDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIPD>>>> Reset time delay (tPD>>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67 Fourth threshold defi nite time (IPD>>>>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>>>>def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>>def) 0...359°IPD>>>>def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>>def) 0.010...30.0 InIPD>>>>def Operating time (tPD>>>>def) 0.04...10.00 s

Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (traditional CTs)Common confi guration:

67N Operating mode (Mode67N ) I /I ∙cosResidual voltage measurement type for 67N - direct/calculated (3VoType67N ) UE / UEC67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M ) 1.5...10.067N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67N )

OFF/Block/Not directional67N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67N )

OFF/Block/Not directionalIED> Element

IED> Curve type DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM

IEDCLP> Activation time (tEDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 sIED> Reset time delay (tED>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67N First threshold defi nite time (IED>def - UED>def)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>def within CLP (IEDCLP>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>def Operating time (tED>def) 0.05...200 s

Inverse time67N First threshold inverse time (IED>inv - UED>inv)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>inv within CLP (IEDCLP>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEnIED>inv Operating time (tED>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

IED>> ElementIED> Curve type (IED>>Curve) DEFINITE,

IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EMIEDCLP>> Activation time (tEDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 sIED>> Reset time delay (tED>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67N Second threshold defi nite time (IED>>def - UED>>def)

•

••

••••

••••

••

••••

••

••••

—

••

••

•

•

••

••••••

••••••

•

••

8 NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>>def within CLP (IEDCLP>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>>def Operating time (tED>>def) 0.05...10.00 s

Inverse time67N Second threshold inverse time (IED>>inv - UED>>inv)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>inv within CLP (IEDCLP>>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEnIED>inv Operating time (tED>>inv) 0.02...10.00 s

IED>>> ElementIEDCLP>>> Activation time (tEDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIED>>> Reset time delay (tED>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67N Third threshold defi nite time (IED>>>def - UED>>>def)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>>>def within CLP (IEDCLP>>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>>>def Operating time (tED>>>def) 0.05...10.00 s

IED>>>> ElementIEDCLP>>>> Activation time (tEDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIED>>>> Reset time delay (tED>>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67N Fourth threshold defi nite time (IED>>>>def - UED>>>>def)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>>>>def within CLP (IEDCLP>>>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>>>>def Operating time (tED>>>>def) 0.05...10.00 s

Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (Thysensor)Common confi guration:

67N Operating mode (Mode67N ) I /I ∙cosResidual voltage measurement UEC67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M ) 1.5...10.067N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67N )

OFF/Block/Not directional67N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67N )

OFF/Block/Not directionalIED> Element

IED> Curve type DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM

IEDCLP> Activation time (tEDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 sIED> Reset time delay (tED>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67N First threshold defi nite time (IED>def - UED>def)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>def within CLP (IEDCLP>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>def Operating time (tED>def) 0.05...200 s

Inverse time67N First threshold inverse time (IED>inv - UED>inv)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>inv within CLP (IEDCLP>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEnIED>inv Operating time (tED>inv) 0.02...60.0 s

IED>> ElementIED> Curve type (IED>>Curve) DEFINITE,

IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EMIEDCLP>> Activation time (tEDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 sIED>> Reset time delay (tED>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

••••••

••••••

••

••••••

••

••••••

—

••••

•

•

••

••••••

••••••

•

••

Defi nite time67N Second threshold defi nite time (IED>>def - UED>>def)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>>def within CLP (IEDCLP>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>>def Operating time (tED>>def) 0.05...10.00 s

Inverse time67N Second threshold inverse time (IED>>inv - UED>>inv)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>inv within CLP (IEDCLP>>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEnIED>inv Operating time (tED>>inv) 0.02...10.00 s

IED>>> ElementIEDCLP>>> Activation time (tEDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIED>>> Reset time delay (tED>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67N Third threshold defi nite time (IED>>>def - UED>>>def)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>>>def within CLP (IEDCLP>>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>>>def Operating time (tED>>>def) 0.05...10.00 s

IED>>>> ElementIEDCLP>>>> Activation time (tEDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 sIED>>>> Reset time delay (tED>>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

Defi nite time67N Fourth threshold defi nite time (IED>>>>def - UED>>>>def)

Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEnResidual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEnCharacteristic angle 0...359°Half operating sector 1...180°IED>>>>def within CLP (IEDCLP>>>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEnIED>>>>def Operating time (tED>>>>def) 0.05...10.00 s

Selective block - BLOCK2Selective block IN:

BLIN Max activation time for phase protections (tB-IPh) 0.10...10.00 sBLIN Max activation time for earth protections (tB-IE) 0.10...10.00 s

Selective block OUT:BLOUT Dropout time delay for phase protections (tF-IPh) 0.00...1.00 sBLOUT Drop-out time delay for phase protections (tF-IE) 0.00...1.00 sBLOUT Drop-out time delay for phase and earth protections (tF-IPh/IE) 0.00...1.00 s

Internal selective block - BLOCK4Output internal selective block dropout time for phase protec-tions (tF-IPh) 0.00...10.00 sOutput internal selective block dropout time for ground protec-tions (tF-IE) 0.00...10.00 s

Breaker failure - BFBF Phase current threshold (IBF>) 0.05...1.00 InBF Residual current threshold (IEBF>) 0.01..2.00 IEnBF Time delay (tBF) 0.06...10.00 s

Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-RESTSecond harmonic restraint threshold (I2ndh>) 10...50 %I2ndh> Reset time delay (t2ndh>RES) 0.00...100.0 s

VT supervision - 74VT74VT Negative sequence overvoltage threshold (U2VT>) 0.05...0.50 En74VT Negative sequence overvoltage threshold (I2VT>) 0.05...0.50 In 74VT Phase undervoltage threshold (UVT<) 0.05...0.50 En 74VT Minimum change of current threshold 74VT (DIVT<) 0.05...0.50 In 74VT Undercurrent inhibition threshold (IVT<) 0.100...40.0 In74VT Alarm time delay (t V T-AL) 0.0...10.0 s

••••••

••••••

••

••••••

••

••••••

—

••

•••

—•

•

—

—

—

9NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

CT supervision - 74CT74CT Threshold (S<) 0.10...0.9574CT Overcurrent threshold (I*) 0.10...1.00 InS< Operating time (tS<) 0.03...200 s

Circuit Breaker supervisionNumber of CB trips (N.Open) 0...10000Cumulative CB tripping currents (SumI) 0...5000 InCB opening time for I^2t calculation (tbreak) 0.05...1.00 sCumulative CB tripping I^2t (SumI^2t) 0...5000 In2.sCB max allowed opening time (tbreak>) 0.05...1.00 s

Pilot wire diagnosticBLOUT1 Diagnostic pulses period (PulseBLOUT1) OFF - 0.1-1-5-10-60-120 sBLIN1 Diagnostic pulses control time interval (PulseBLIN1) OFF - 0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s

METERING & RECORDING

Measured parametersDirect:

Frequency fFundamental RMS phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3 Fundamental RMS phase voltages UL1, UL2, UL3Fundamental RMS residual current IE Fundamental RMS residual voltage (Traditional VTs) UE

Calculated:Thermal image DThetaFundamental RMS phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23, U31Fundamental RMS calculated residual voltage UEC Maximum current between IL1-IL2-IL3 ILmax Minimum current between IL1-IL2-IL3 ILminAverage current between IL1-IL2-IL3 ILMaximum voltage between UL1-UL2-UL3 ULmaxAverage voltage between UL1-UL2-UL3 ULMaximum voltage between U12-U23-U31 UmaxAverage voltage between U12-U23-U31 U

Phase:Displacement angle of IL1 respect to UL1 PhiL1Displacement angle of IL2 respect to UL2 PhiL2Displacement angle of IL3 respect to UL3 PhiL3Displacement angle of IL1 respect to U23 Alpha1Displacement angle of IL2 respect to U31 Alpha2Displacement angle of IL3 respect to U12 Alpha3Displacement angle of UE respect to IE (traditional VTs) PhiEDisplacement angle of UEC respect to IE PhiEC

Sequence:Positive sequence current I1Negative sequence current I2Negative sequence current/positive sequence current ratio I2/I1Negative sequence voltage U2

Power:Total active power PTotal reactive power QTotal apparent power SPower factor cosPhiPhase active powers PL1, PL2, PL3 Phase reactive powers QL1, QL2, QL3 Power factors cosPhiL1, cosPhiL2, cosPhiL3

2nd harmonic:Second harmonic phase currents IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2ndMaximum of the second harmonic phase currents/fundamen-tal component percentage ratio I-2nd /IL

3rd harmonic:Third harmonic phase currents IL1-3rd, IL2-3rd, IL3-3rdThird harmonic residual current IE-3rdThird harmonic residual voltage (traditional VTs) UE-3rd

4th harmonic:Fourth harmonic phase currents IL1-4th, IL2-4th, IL3-4th

—

—

—

—

•••••

••••••••••

••••••••

••••

•••••••

••

•••

•

5th harmonic:Fifth harmonic phase currents IL1-5th, IL2-5th, IL3-5th

Demand phase currents:Phase fi xed currents demand IL1FIX, IL2FIX, IL3FIXPhase rolling currents demand IL1ROL, IL2ROL, IL3ROLPhase peak currents demand IL1MA X, IL2MA X, IL3MA XPhase minimum currents demand IL1MIN, IL2MIN, IL3MIN

Demand power:Fixed active power demand PFIXFixed reactive power demand QFIXRolling active power demand PROLRolling reactive power demand QROLPeak active power demand PMA XPeak reactive power demand QMA XMinimum active power demand PMINMinimum reactive power demand QMIN

Energy:Positive active energy EA+Negative active energy EA-Total active energy EAPositive reactive energy EQ+Negative reactive energy EQ-Total reactive energy EQ

Fault recording (SFR)Number of faults 20Recording mode circularTrigger:

Output relays of enabled protection or control element (OFF-ON)External trigger (binary inputs) IN1...INx

Data recorded:Counter (resettable by ThySetter) 0...109

Time stamp Date and timeCause tripped elementFundamental RMS phase currents IL1r, IL2r, IL3rFundamental RMS residual current IErFundamental RMS phase voltages UL1r, UL2r, UL3rFundamental RMS phase-to-phase voltages U12r, U23r, U31rFundamental RMS residual voltages (measured and calculated) UEr, UECrDisplacement angles (IL1-UL1, IL2-UL2, IL3-UL3) PhiL1r, PhiL2r, PhiL3rDisplacement angles (IL1-U23, IL2-U31, IL3-UL3) Alpha1r, Alpha2r, Alpha3rDisplacement angle UE-IE (traditional VTs) PhiErDisplacement angle UEC-IE PhiECrThermal image DTheta- rBinary inputs state IN1, IN2...INxOutput relays state K1...K6...K10Fault cause info (operating phase) L1, L2, L3

Event recording (SER)Number of events 300 Recording mode circularTrigger:

Start/Trip of enabled protection or control element Binary inputs switching (OFF/ON or ON/OFF) IN1...INxSetting changesAuxiliary supply Power UP/Power DOWN

Data recorded: Counter (resettable by ThySetter) 0...109

Cause binary input/trip/setting change/Power ON/OFFTime stamp Date and time

Settings recordingNumber of setting changes 8 Recording mode circularData recorded:

Setting counter 0...109

Setting data description and parameter Time stamp Date and time

•

••••

••••••••

••••••

—

••

••••••••

••••••••

—

••••

•••

—

•••

10 NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography) [1]

File format COMTRADERecords depending on setting [2]

Recording mode circularSampling rate > 1 kHz

Trigger setup:Pre-trigger time 0.05...1.00 sPost-trigger time 0.05...60.00 sTrigger from inputs IN1, IN2...INxTrigger from outputs K1...K6...K10Communication ThySetter

Set sample channels: Instantaneous currents iL1, iL2, iL3, iEInstantaneous voltages uL1, uL2, uL3, uE

Set analog channels (Analog 1...12): Frequency fFundamental RMS phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3Fundamental RMS residual current IEFundamental RMS phase voltages UL1, UL2, UL3Fundamental RMS residual voltage UEFundamental RMS phase-to-phase voltages U12, U23, U31Fundamental RMS calculated residual voltage UECDisplacement angles IL1-UL1, IL2-UL2, IL3-UL3 PhiL1, PhiL2, PhiL3Displacement angles IL1-U23, IL2-U31, IL3-UL3 Alpha1, Alpha2, Alpha3Displacement angle UE-IE (traditional VTs) PhiEDisplacement angle UEC-IE PhiECSecond harmonic phase currents IL1-2nd, IL2-2nd, IL3-2ndMaximum of the second harmonic phase currents/fundamen-tal component percentage ratio I-2nd /ILTemperature T1...T8

Set digital channels (Digital 1...12): Output relays state K1...K6...K10Binary inputs state IN1, IN2...INx

—

•••••

••

•••••••••••••

•

••

Note 1- A licence for the digital fault recorder function is required.The oscillography records are stored in non-volatile memory.

Note [2] - For instance, with following setting:Pre-trigger time 0.25 sPost-trigger time 0.25 sSampled channels iL1, iL2, iL3, iEAnalog channels IL1, IL2, IL3, IEDigital channels K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, IN1, IN2

More than three hundred records can be stored

•••••

Oscillography (DFR)

11NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

NA60-fun.ai

OPER

ATIO

N (*

*)

NA60

L1L2L3

UL1

UL2

UL3

B5

B6

B3

B4

B1A NB NC N

n an bn c

B2

C2

C1

C3

C4C5

C6

P1S1S2

P2

IL1

IL2

IL3

IE

C7

C8

P1S1S2

P2

UE

B7

B8

dn dadn dbdn dc 59N

50N/51N

49

50/51

74CT

27

67

59

74VT

67N

BIN

ARY

INPU

TS

50BF

CB position

(*)

(*) Antiferrorisonance

LOAD (***)

BUSBAR

(**) OPERATION FOR:- 67 elements with characteristic angle adjusted within 0°... 90° or 270° ...359° ranges- 67N elements for insulated neutral systems and characteristic angle setting = 90°

(***) MEASUREMENTS:- Positive sign for measurement of active power and energy with passive load- Negative sign for measurement of active power and energy with generators

Protective elements—

12 NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

(**) OPERATION FOR:- 67 elements with characteristic angle adjusted within 0°... 90° or 270° ...359° ranges- 67N elements for insulated neutral systems and characteristic angle setting = 90°

NA60

OUTP

UT R

ELAY

S

UAUXA1 ≅

A2

A9

A10

A11A12

A13

A14

E1

THYB

US

D1

ETHE

RNET

A3A4A5A6A7A8

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K1

RS48

5

F1F2F3F4F5A+

B-

BLOC

K OU

T

A15BLOUT-

BLOUT+ A16

UE

UL1

UL2

UL3

BIN

ARY

INPU

TSA19IN1

IN2

A20A21A22

VOLT

AGE

INPU

TS

R (*)

(*) Antiferroresonance

da

dn

n

a

N

A

L1L2

LOAD (***)

L3

BLOC

K INA17

A18

C1IL1

IL2

IL3

IE

CURR

ENT

INPU

TS

P1S1S2

P2

P1S1S2

P2

C2C3

C4C5

C6

C7

C8

B7

B8

B5

B6

B3

B4

B1

B2

HUB

RS23

2

Supervision unit

OUTPUT

ON

BU

S

RU

N

1 2 3 4 5MODULO 4 RELE’ + 8 INGRESSI DIGITALI4 RELAYS + 8 BINARY INPUTS MODULE

INPUT

MRI

3436 35 303233 31 2829434445 394042 41 38 375254 53 485051 49 4647

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 181716151413121110 212019 252322 24 2726

BUSBAR

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8

E1

(***) MEASUREMENTS:- Positive sign for measurement of active power and energy with passive load- Negative sign for measurement of active power and energy with generators

67, 6

7NOP

ERAT

ION

(**)

Connection diagram example with CTs and VTs inputs—

13NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

(*) OPERATION FOR:- 67 elements with characteristic angle adjusted within 0°... 90° or 270° ...359° ranges- 67N elements for insulated neutral systems and characteristic angle setting = 90°

(**) MESUREMENTS:- Positive sign for measurement of active power and energy with passive load- Negative sign for measurement of active power and energy with generators

NA60

OUTP

UT R

ELAY

S

UAUXA1 ≅

A2

A9

A10

A11A12

A13

A14

E1

THYB

US

A3A4A5A6A7A8

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K1

BLOC

K OU

T

A15BLOUT-

BLOUT+ A16

BIN

ARY

INPU

TSA19IN1

IN2

A20A21A22

L1L2 SBARRE

LINEA (**)

L3

BLOC

K INA17

A18

IE

P1S1S2

P2

C1

C2

D1

ETHE

RNET

RS23

2RS

485

F1F2F3F4F5A+

B-

ThyS

enso

r IN

PUTS

Resi

dual

cur

rent

INPU

T

IL1-UL1

IL2-UL2

IL3-UL3

P1

P2

F1RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

D1

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

C1 C2

E1

L1

L2

L3

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

67, 6

7NOP

ERAT

ION

(*)

Connection diagram example with ThySensor inputs—

14 NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

2510

4

225

96P2 P1

P1

Ø 100Ø 110

50

Cable gland

Mounting hole M10 Mounting hole M10

Busbar mounting hole M12

Busbar mounting hole M12

Spacer 8mm M4

Capacitive divider output

4262

Ø 11014

Ø 20 Ø 20

ThySensor—

15NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011

120

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8

E1

101

171

8031

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8

E1

128.5110

200

168

20

205

149

30530

107

177

ø 4.5

102.5 ±0.370

161

154

ø 4.5

ø 4.5

212.525 15

170

275

177

(4U)

101.

6

482.6465

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

FLUSH MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING FLUSH MOUNTING PROJECTING MOUNTING(Separate operator panel)

FLUSH MOUNTING SEPARATEOPERATOR PANEL

PROJECTING MOUNTINGPROJECTING MOUNTING(Stand alone)(Separate operator panel)

N.4 holes ø 3.5

RACK MOUNTING FLUSH MOUNTING CUTOUT

SIDE VIEW

FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW

D I M E N S I O N S

Headquarter: 20139 Milano - Piazza Mistral, 7 - Tel. +39 02 574 957 01 ra - Fax +39 02 574 037 63Factory: 35127 Padova - Z.I. Sud - Via dell’Artigianato, 48 - Tel. +39 049 894 770 1 ra - Fax +39 049 870 139 0

www.thytronic.it www.thytronic.com [email protected]

A PERSONALISED SERVICE OF THE PRODUCTION,

A RAPID DELIVERY, A COMPETITIVE PRICE

AND AN ATTENTIVE EVALUATION OF OUR

CUSTOMERS NEEDS, HAVE ALL CONTRIBUTED

IN MAKING US ONE OF THE BEST AND MOST

RELIABLE PRODUCERS OF PROTECTIVE RELAYS.

FORTY YEARS OF EXPERIENCE HAS MADE

STANDARD THESE ADVANTAGES THAT ARE

GREATLY APPRECIATED BY LARGE COMPANIES

THAT DEAL ON THE INTERNATIONAL MARKET.

A HIGHLY QUALIFIED AND MOTIVATED STAFF

PERMITS US TO OFFER AN AVANT-GARDE

PRODUCT AND SERVICE WHICH MEET ALL

SAFETY AND CONTINUITY DEMANDS, VITAL

IN THE GENERATION OF ELECTRIC POWER. OUR

COMPANY PHILOSOPHY HAS HAD A POSITIVE

REACTION FROM THE MARKET BY BACKING

OUR COMMITMENT AND HENCE STIMULATING

OUR GROWTH.

www.thytronic.it

www.elster.com

Medidor ALPHA Plus®

Como un medidor trifásico multifunción con medición de energía activa y reactiva, validación de servicio, PQM, perfil de carga y comunicaciones: ALPHA Plus significa medición avanzada

Monitoreo de Calidad de Energía (PQM) Cuando esta característica está habilitada, el medidor ALPHA Plus busca excepciones a los umbrales definidos por el usuario tales como voltaje, corriente, factor de potencia y distorsión armónica total. El medidor realiza varias pruebas que miden y almacenan datos de calidad de energía las 24 horas del día.

Pruebas de servicio Las pruebas de servicio se ejecutan para verificar la validez del servicio eléctrico así como la correcta conexión del medidor. El medidor ALPHA Plus verifica el tipo de servicio, rotación o inversión de fase y la validez de los voltajes de fase. El medidor también determina si las corrientes de fase están dentro de los umbrales definidos por el usuario.

Medición para facturación Los medidores A1RL+ miden, almacenan y muestran una lista completa de valores de energía y demanda tales como kW, kVAR, kWh, kVARh. El medidor A1RL+ ofrece valores vectoriales de kVA como alternativa de cantidad medida.

El medidor ALPHA Plus es un medidor avanzado, construido en base a la tecnología de medición ALPHA®. El medidor puede utilizarse en sistemas monofásicos o trifásicos, posee un amplio rango de operación, es multitarifa, realiza la validación del servicio y puede monitorear la Calidad de Energía, además provee lecturas del perfil de carga mediante comunicaciones remotas.

Funciones y características avanzadas La tarjeta principal posee una memoria de 28kB disponible para almacenar datos del perfil de carga y el registro de eventos. Con intervalos de 15 minutos puede almacenar: Canales Días máx. de

almacenamiento 1 Canal 141 días* 4 Canales 36 días* * El número de días depende de la cantidad de eventos a almacenar en el Registro de Eventos.

El perfil de carga es almacenado en una memoria no volátil. El medidor ALPHA Plus graba: el día y la hora de fallas de energía, cambios a modo test, cambios de hora y reseteos de la demanda. Cuando el Monitoreo de Calidad de Energía está habilitado, el medidor incluye también el día y la hora de los eventos PQM (incluyendo caídas de voltaje).

ELSTER Medidores S.A.

Av. La Marina 842 La Perla - Callao 4 Perú

T +51 (1) 457 5533 F +51 (1) 457 5686

www.elster.com © 2008 por Elster. Todos los derechos reservados. La información contenida puede cambiar sin previo aviso. Las especificaciones técnicas de los productos citados son aquellas que tienen vigencia al momento de la publicación. Impreso en el Perú. www.elster.com

Especificaciones Técnicas

Precisión Con carga = ± (0.2 + (0.001 (clase/I) (1 + tan θ))) %

Corriente máxima Continua hasta 120% de la corriente nominal del medidor

Temporal (1 seg.) a 200% de la corriente máxima del medidor

Rango de Corriente 0 hasta Amperios de clase del medidor

Forma 1S y 3S Otras formas

Corriente de Arranque 10mA para clase 20 100mA para clase 200 160mA para clase 320

5mA para clase 20 50mA para clase 200 80mA para clase 320

Rangos de Voltaje Nominal Operación

120V a 480V 96V a 528V

Frecuencia 50Hz o 60Hz ± 5%

Rango de temperatura -40 °C a +85°C (dentro de la tapa del medidor)

Rango de humedad 0% a 100% (sin condensación)

Fuente de alimentación Circuito voltimétrico Circuito amperimétrico

Consumo Menor a 3W

0.008W @ 120V 0.03 W @ 240V 0.04 W @ 480V

Típico 0.1mΩ a 25°C

Test realizado Resultado

ANSI C37.90.1 Oscilatorio 2.5 kV, 2500 impulsos

Transiente rápido 5 kV, 2500 impulsos

ANSI C62.41 6 kV a 1.2/50 μs, 10 impulsos

IEC 61000-4-4 4 kV, 2.5 Khz. Impulsos repetitivos durante 1 minuto

Variación frente a la onda de voltaje

ANSI C12.1 dieléctrico 2.5 kV, 60 Hz durante un minuto

Deslizamiento 0.000A (sin corriente)

No mayor de un pulso medido por cantidad, de acuerdo a los requerimientos de la norma ANSI C12.1

Precisión del reloj interno Cumple con los límites ANSI de 0.02% usando el cristal de 32.768 kHz. El comportamiento inicial esperado es igual o menor que ±55 segundos por mes a temperatura a la sombra.

Supercondensador con valor nominal de 0.1F, 5.5V

Batería de Litio LiSOCl2 vida útil sin uso de 20 años, en trabajo continuo a 25°C 5 años Capacidad de operación

durante apagones 6 horas a 25°C Valor nominal: 800mAhr

Unidad Caja con 4 medidores

Base S 5.06 libras [2.30 kg] 13.46 libras [6.11 kg] Pesos de despacho (valores aproximados)

Base A 7.38 libras [3.35 kg] 26.02 libras [11.82 kg]

Comunicaciones

Puerto óptico 300 a 28,800 bps

Comunicaciones remotas 1,200 a 19,200 bps

País de Fabricación Estados Unidos

Sobre el Grupo ELSTER Líder mundial en infraestructura de medición avanzada, medición integrada y aplicación de soluciones para las industrias de gas, electricidad y agua. Los sistemas y soluciones de ELSTER son producto de más de 170 años de experiencia en medición de recursos y energía. Elster provee soluciones y tecnología avanzada para ayudar a las empresas a adquirir y utilizar los sistemas de medición de una manera más fácil, eficiente y confiable para mejorar el servicio al cliente, aumentar la eficiencia operacional e incrementar ingresos. Las soluciones AMI de ELSTER permiten a las empresas distribuir adecuadamente los recursos de gas, electricidad y agua mejorando significativamente la relación costo-eficiencia.

Comunicaciones Los datos pueden ser obtenidos usando el puerto óptico (estándar). Adicionalmente al puerto óptico, hay disponibles otras interfaces de comunicación para realizar lecturas remotas como: • Módem telefónico interno de 2400

baudios con sistema de llamada por apagones.

• Interfaz serial RS-232. • Interfaz serial RS-485. • Salidas KYZ.

Instrumentación Los valores de instrumentación proveen de un análisis casi instantáneo del servicio eléctrico. Todas las opciones pueden ser programadas para mostrarse en la pantalla en el modo normal o alterno. • Valores por cada fase:

• Voltaje y corriente. • Ángulos de voltaje y corriente de

fase (comparados con la fase A). • Ángulo de la corriente de fase en

relación al voltaje de fase. • Factor de potencia y el ángulo del

factor de potencia. • kW, kVAR y kVA.

• Frecuencia del sistema. • kW, kVAR, kVA, factor de potencia y

ángulo del factor de potencia del sistema.

Las dimensiones son referenciales y están expresadas en: pulgadas [milímetros]. No usarlas para construcción

Tecnología que impulsa el desarrollo ELSTER es el líder en telemedición: el medidor ALPHA Plus permite la lectura y programación de manera remota, pudiendo ser integrados en sistemas de medición.

NA011- Manual - 05 - 2010

MANUAL

NA011PHASE & RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT,

AUTOMATIC RECLOSUREPROTECTION RELAY

22 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION 5Scope and liability ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5Applicability ......................................................................................................................................................................................................5Conformity ........................................................................................................................................................................................................5Technical support ............................................................................................................................................................................................5Copyright ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5Warranty ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5Safety recommendations ...............................................................................................................................................................................5Insulation tests ................................................................................................................................................................................................5Product identification .....................................................................................................................................................................................6Environment .....................................................................................................................................................................................................6Graphical conventions ...................................................................................................................................................................................6Glossary/definitions ........................................................................................................................................................................................6

2 GENERAL 10Preface ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10Photo .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10Main features .................................................................................................................................................................................................11

3 TECHNICAL DATA 123.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................................................12

Mechanical data ...........................................................................................................................................................................................12Insulation ........................................................................................................................................................................................................12EMC tests for interference immunity .........................................................................................................................................................12Voltage dip and interruption ........................................................................................................................................................................12EMC tests for interference immunity .........................................................................................................................................................12Emission ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13Mechanical tests .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 13Climatic tests ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13Safety ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13Certifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13

3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS ...............................................................................................................................................................................................14Auxiliary power supply U aux .......................................................................................................................................................................14Phase current input circuits ........................................................................................................................................................................14Residual current input circuit ......................................................................................................................................................................14Binary input circuits ......................................................................................................................................................................................14

3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS ............................................................................................................................................................................................14Output relays ..................................................................................................................................................................................................14

3.4 MMI .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................153.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES ...................................................................................................................................................................15

Local port ........................................................................................................................................................................................................15Remote ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15

3.6 GENERAL SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................................................................15 3.7 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS .................................................................................................................................................................................15

Phase overcurrent - 50/51 ............................................................................................................................................................................15Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N .................................................................................................................................................................17

3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18Circuit Breaker monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18Oscillography (DFR) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 18

3.9 MEASURES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18Measures ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18Digital inputs ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18Automatic Reclose ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18Circuit Breaker .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 18

4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS 194.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19

Power supply board ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 19CPU board ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20Input board .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20MMI (keyboard, LED and display) ............................................................................................................................................................. 20

4.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................................................................................21Kernel ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................21Drivers .............................................................................................................................................................................................................21Application......................................................................................................................................................................................................21Base protocol (kernel) ..................................................................................................................................................................................21Calibration (kernel) ........................................................................................................................................................................................21

3NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010

Communication (drivers) ..............................................................................................................................................................................21MMI (drivers) .................................................................................................................................................................................................21Data Base (application/drivers) ..................................................................................................................................................................22Self-test (application) ...................................................................................................................................................................................22Development tools ........................................................................................................................................................................................22

4.3 I/O DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 23Metering inputs ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 23Signal processing ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 23Use of measured values ...............................................................................................................................................................................24Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................25Output relays ..................................................................................................................................................................................................26LED indicators ................................................................................................................................................................................................27Communication interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................... 28

4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS ................................................................................................................................................................................ 29Phase overcurrent - 50/51 ............................................................................................................................................................................31Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N .................................................................................................................................................................34Breaker failure - BF .......................................................................................................................................................................................37

4.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38Circuit breaker supervision ........................................................................................................................................................................ 38Circuit breaker commands ......................................................................................................................................................................... 38Automatic reclosure - 79 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 39 Test ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 43Oscillography ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 43

5 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS 44Measures ........................................................................................................................................................................................................44Circuit breaker ...............................................................................................................................................................................................44Counters ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................44Fault recording - SFR ....................................................................................................................................................................................44Event recording - Events ..............................................................................................................................................................................44Info ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................45Protections trip ..............................................................................................................................................................................................45Self-test ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................45Oscillography - DFR ......................................................................................................................................................................................45

6 INSTALLATION 476.1 PACKAGING .......................................................................................................................................................................................................476.2 MOUNTING ........................................................................................................................................................................................................476.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 496.4 NOMINAL CURRENT In AND IEn SETTINGS ................................................................................................................................................546.5 NOMINAL CURRENT In SETTING FOR LPCT ...............................................................................................................................................566.6 LED ALLOCATION ..............................................................................................................................................................................................576.7 FINAL OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................................................................................................57

7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS 587.1 SW ThySetter.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 58

ThySetter installation ................................................................................................................................................................................... 58ThySetter use ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 58

7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 59Reading variables (READ) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 59Setting modifying (SET) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 59Test .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 60Communication ..............................................................................................................................................................................................61Reset ................................................................................................................................................................................................................61DEFAULT (Option) ..........................................................................................................................................................................................61Data/time setting (Time) ...............................................................................................................................................................................61Circuit breaker commands ..........................................................................................................................................................................61

7.3 MENU TREE........................................................................................................................................................................................................627.4 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................................................................................677.5 REPAIR ................................................................................................................................................................................................................677.6 PACKAGING .......................................................................................................................................................................................................67

8 APPENDIX 688.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves .................................................................................................................................................... 68

Mathematical formula ................................................................................................................................................................................. 68Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ..................................................................... 69Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ............................................................................. 70Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) .....................................................................71Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ...........................................................72Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ................................................................... 73

44 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010

Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ..........................................................748.2 APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves .........................................................................................................................................75

Mathematical formula ..................................................................................................................................................................................75Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) ..............................................................................76Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) ...........................................................................................77Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ................................................................................. 78Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) .................................................................. 79Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) ................................................................................ 80Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ........................................................................81

8.2 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram ...........................................................................................................................................................................828.3 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................................................. 838.4 APPENDIX B3 - Connection diagrams ..........................................................................................................................................................848.5 APPENDIX C - Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................................. 888.6 APPENDIX D - Revisions history ................................................................................................................................................................... 898.7 APPENDIX E - EC Declaration of conformity ............................................................................................................................................... 90

5NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010INTRODUCTION

1 I N T R O D U C T I O N1 I N T R O D U C T I O NScope and liability

This document describes the functions, the technical data of NA011 devices; instructions for mount-ing, setting and commissioning are included.This manual has been checked out, however, deviations from the description cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability in a legal sense for correctness and completeness of the information or from any damage that might result from its use is formally disclaimed.The information given in this document is reviewed regularly; any corrections and integration will be included in subsequent editions that are identifi ed by the date of revision.We appreciate any suggestions for improvement.We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice.

ApplicabilityThis manual is valid for NA011 devices with fi rmware version 1.00 and following.Revision history is listed in appendix.

ConformityThe product complies with the CEE directives:

EMC Council Directives: 89/336/EECLow voltage Directives: 73/23/EEC

Technical supportContact: THYTRONIC Technical Service www.thytronic.it

CopyrightAll right reserved; It is forbidden to copy, modify or store material (document and sw) protected by copyright without Thytronic consent.

WarrantyThytronic warrants devices against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of retail purchase by the original end-user purchaser (“War-ranty Period”).

Safety recommendationsThe warming contained in this document are all-important for safety; special attention must be paid to the following symbols:

Installation and commissioning must be carried out by qualifi ed person; Thytronic assumes no re-sponsibility for damages caused from improper use that does not comply all warning and caution in this manual.In particular the following requirements must be met:

Remove power before opening it.Verify the voltage absence by means suitable instrumentation on relay connections; attention must be paid to all circuits supplied by external sources (binary input, CT, etc...) Care must be taken when handling metal parts (front panel, connectors).

Insulation testsAfter insulation tests, hazardous voltages (capacitor charges,...) may be arise; it is advisable to grad-ually reduce the test voltage avoiding to erase it abruptly.

••

••

•

WARNING Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautionsare not taken.WARNING Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautionsare not taken.

CAUTION Minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not takenCAUTION Minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken

CAUTIONSettings must be established on the basis of a coordination study.Numerical values inside examples have educational purpose only; they don’t be used, in no way,for actual applications.

CAUTIONSettings must be established on the basis of a coordination study.Numerical values inside examples have educational purpose only; they don’t be used, in no way,for actual applications.

http://www.thytronic.it

66 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 INTRODUCTION

Product identifi cationEach device is equipped with:

Identifi cation label installed on the front side with following informations: code number, phase and residual nominal currents, auxiliary voltage range and CE mark:

Test label with following informations: data, serial number and test operator signature.

EnvironmentThe NA011 device must be employed according to the environment conditions shown (see technical data).In case of different environment conditions, appropriate provisions must be provided (conditioning system, humidity control, etc...).If contaminants are present (dust, corrosive substances, etc...), filters must be provided.

Graphical conventionsThe CEI/IEC and ANSI symbols is employed where possible:e.g.: 51 = ANSI code concerning the overcurrent element.Following text formats are used:The ThySetter[1] menu: Phase overcurrent -50/51The parameter description (measures, thresholds, operate time,...) and related value: First threshold 50/51 defi nite time I>defThe display messages (MMI) are shown as: NA011Notes are highlighted with cursive letters inside colored bar

Note: Useful description note

Glossary/defi nitionsI En Relay residual nominal currentI Enp Residual CT primary nominal currentI n Relay phase nominal currentI np Phase CT primary nominal current50/51 Phase overcurrent ANSI code50N/51N Residual overcurrent ANSI code79 Automatic reclosing

DFR Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography)SER Sequential Event RecorderSFR Sequential Fault RecorderANSI American National Standard InstituteIEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics EngineersIEC International Electrotechnical CommissionCENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique

Note 1 The graphic interface and the operation of the ThySetter software are described in the relative chapters

•

•

NA011#xxx0

In 5A 1A

50-5150N-51NCB OPENCB CLOSED79

5A

UAUX 24-230 Vac/dc12345

NA011#xxx1

IIn

n

Rated 50...500AExtended 50...1250A


UAUX 24-230 V12345

NA011#xxx2

In 5A 1A


5A

UAUX 24-230 Vac/dcIEn 1A 1A 5A

12345

NA011#xxx3

IIn

n



IEn 1A 1A 5A UAUX 24-230 V12345

NA011#xxx0

In 5A 1A


5A

UAUX 24-230 Vac/dc12345

NA011#xxx1

IIn

n



UAUX 24-230 V12345

NA011#xxx2

In 5A 1A


5A


12345

NA011#xxx3

IIn

n



IEn 1A 1A 5A UAUX 24-230 V12345


52 o CB (Circuit Breaker) Circuit Breaker52a Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the same position as the

breaker. It can be assigned to a binary input to locate the CB posi-tion (Breaker failure and/or CB diagnostic functions). (52a open = CB open)

52b Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the opposite position as the breaker (52b open = CB closed)

K1...K4 Output relaystTR1... tTR4 Output relay minimum pulse widthLatched Output relay with latched operation (manual reset) Output relay with

latched operation (automatic reset)

No-latched Output relay with no-latched operation (automatic reset)

CT or TA Current TransformerLPCT Low Power Current Transformer

P1 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI dot)

P2 IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI no-dot)

S1 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI dot)

S2 IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI no-dot)

Self test DiagnosticStart Leave an initial condition or reset condition (Pickup)Trip Operation (with operate time)

Operating time Duration of time interval between the instant when the character-istic quantity in reset condition is changed, under specifi ed condi-tions, and the instant when the relay operates

Dropout ratio The ratio of a reset value to an operate value in well-specifi ed con-ditions. The dropout ratio may be lower or greater than 1 according as an over or under element is considered

Reset time Duration of the time interval between the instant when the charac-teristic quantity in operate condition is changed, under specifi ed conditions, and the instant when the relay operates.

The stated reset time is related to a step variation of characteristic quantity in operate condition to the reset condition.

Overshoot time The critical impulse time for a relay which is in its reset condition, is the longest duration a specifi ed change in the input energizing quantity(ies) (characteristic quantity), which will cause the relay to change to operate condition, can be applied without the relay switches. The overshoot time is the difference from the operate time and the critical impulse time.

The declared values for the overshoot time are applicable with the lower setting value of the operation time.

MMI (Man Machine Interface) Operator front panel

ThySetter Setting and monitoring softwareLog fi le A text fi le that lists actions that have occurred (ThySetter).J2SE Java Platform Standard EditionSw SoftwareFw FirmwareUpgrade Firmware upgradeXML eXtensible Markup Language

88 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 INTRODUCTION

Symbols.ai

Symbols

I>> Star t

I>> BF_OUT

IPh Block2

Logic internal signal (output); may be a logical state (e .g . I>> Star t) or a numerical valueIt is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface)

Logic external signal (intput); may be a command coming from a binary input or a sw commandIt is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface)

Internal signal (e.g. Breaker Failure output state concerning to the 2nd threshold of the 50 element) It is not available for reading (missing arrow)

AND and NAND logic gates

OR and NOR logic gates

Limit block (I>> threshold).

Computation block (Max phase current)

Threshold setting (e.g. pickup I >>).The value is available for reading and is adjustable by means ThySetter + MMI.

Switch

ON delay timer with reset (tON delay)

ON delay timer without reset (tON delay)

OFF delay timer (dropout) without reset (tDROP delay)

Curve type (definite/inverse time)0T

I L3

M a x [ I L1 ,I L2 ,I L3 ]I L2

I L1

tON tON tON tON

t

RESET

INPUT

OUTPUT

tDROPtON tON

t

INPUT

OUTPUT

tON tON tON

t

INPUT

OUTPUT

0TtON

& &

≥1 ≥1

EXOR logic gate

tDROP

=1

I >>

II ≥ I >>

tON

RESET

0T

0 T


Symbols1 .ai

tON tON tON

t

RESET

INPUT

OUTPUT

tDROP

tDROP

tDROP tDROP

Minimum pulse width operation for output relays (tTR) tTR

t

tTR

INPUT

OUTPUT

tTR

0 T

tTR

t

tTR

INPUT

OUTPUT

Latched operating mode for output relays and LEDs

Pulse operating mode for output relays

t

INPUT

OUTPUT

Latched

tTR

T0RESET

OFF delay timer (dropout) with reset (tDROP delay)

1010 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 GENERAL

2 G E N E R A L2 G E N E R A LPreface

The relay type NA011 can be used in radial networks as feeder or power transformer protection. In solidly grounded systems the residual overcurrent protection can be used on feeders of any length, while in ungrounded or Petersen coil and/or resistance grounded systems, the residual overcurrent protection can be used on feeders of small length in order to avoid unwanted trippings due to the capacitive current contribution of the feeder on external ground fault.Beside to the phase and residual overcurrent protections, the automatic reclosing function is pro-vided.The NA011 protection relay may be shipped with traditional CTs or low power (LPCT) current inputs; for both versions, the residual overcurrent protection can use the measured (CTs or balanced trans-former) or the calculated residual current.

Following input circuits are available:Phase current inputs

Traditional CTsThree phase current inputs with secondary nominal currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches.

Low power CTsThree phase current inputs with primary nominal currents independently selectable through DIP-switches and software.

Residual current inputMeasured residual current

One residual current input with secondary nominal current selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches.

Calculated residual currentResidual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors.

Setting, programming and reading operations must be effected by means of Personal Computer with ThySetter software or by means of remote communication interface (RS485 bus); all operations must be performed through MMI.The NA011 hardware case is suitable for fl ash and rack mountingOther options are:

Auxiliary power supply operating range.Communication protocols (Modbus or IEC60870-5-103).

Photo

•

•

•

•

••

11NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010GENERAL

Main featuresMetallic case. Backlight LCD 2x16 Display.Eight LEDs that may be joined with matrix criteria to many and various functions.RESET key to clear LED indications and latched output relays.Three binary inputs.Independently settable for start, trip, self-test and control four output relay (K1...K4) Each output relay may be set with normally energized or normally de-energized operating mode and manual or automatic reset (latched/no-latched).Rear RS485 port, with ModBus protocol.RS232 front serial port (local communication for Thysetter).Real time clock with super capacitor backup.

The most signifi cant constructive features are:Galvanically insulated input and output circuits (communication and binary circuits included).Fast sampling rate for inputs.Optimum fi ltering of input signals through combined use of analog and digital fi lters.Traditional electromechanical-type fi nal output contacts with continuous monitoring of control coil continuity.Auxiliary supply comprising a switching-type voltage stabilizing circuit having a very wide working range and a very small power dissipationNominal frequency: 50 or 60 Hz.

The most signifi cant operating features are:Programming of operating modes and parameters by means of the front keys and alphanumeric display, with a programming procedure based on carrying out guided selections and on explicit and immediate signalling of the operations being performed, so that such procedure can be carried out without coding tables or mnemonic informations.The feature modifi cation operations do not interrupt the normal functions of the relay.Impossibility of programming unacceptable parameter values, thanks to the automatic limitation of top and bottom scale values for the relative setting ranges.Currents are sampled 64 times per period and measured in the effective value (RMS) of the funda-mental component using the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and digital fi lters.The fault recorder (SFR) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last twenty events upon trigger of binary input/output and/or element pickup (start-trip).The event recorder (SER) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last three hundred events upon trigger of binary input/output.Digital fault recorder (DFR) in COMTRADE format (oscillography).

••••••

•••

••••

•

•

•

••

•

•

•

•

1212 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 TECHNICAL DATA

3 T E C H N I C A L D A T A3 T E C H N I C A L D A T A

3.1 GENERAL

Mechanical dataMounting Flush, RackExternal dimensions 177 x 107 x 105 (high x width x depth)Terminals screw connectionMass 1.2 kg

Reference standards EN 60529, EN 60529/A1Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)Front IP52Terminals IP20

Insulation

Reference standards EN 60255-5 IEC 60255-5

High voltage test (50 Hz 60 s) Auxiliary power supply 2 kVInput circuits 2 kVOutput circuits 2 kVOutput circuits (between open contacts) 1 kVCommunication interfaces 500 V

Impulse voltage withstand test (1.2/50 μs):Auxiliary power supply 5 kVInput circuits 5 kVOutput circuits 5 kVOutput circuits (between open contacts) 2.5 kV

Insulation resistance >100 MΩ

EMC tests for interference immunityReference standards

Product standard for measuring relays EN 50263Generic standards immunity for industrial environments EN 61000-6-2Electromagnetic compatibility requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment

EN 60255-26

Apparati di automazione e controllo per centrali e stazioni elettricheCompatibilità elettromagnetica - Immunità ENEL REMC 02

• Normativa di compatibilità elettromeccanica per apparati e sistemi ENEL REMC 01

Voltage dip and interruption

Reference standards EN 61000-4-29 IEC 60255-22-11Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on dc input power port immunity tests

Auxiliary power supply in dc energizing quantity Interruption (UT=40%) 100 msInterruption (UT=0%) 50 ms

• Voltage variations (UT=80...120%) 10 s

EMC tests for interference immunityReference standards EN 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-1 EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-4-12Damped oscillatory wave

0.1 MHz and 1 MHz common mode 2.5 kV0.1 MHz and 1 MHz differential mode 1.0 kVRing wave common mode 2.0 kVRing wave differential mode 1.0 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-2 IEC 60255-22-2 EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2Electrostatic discharge

Contact discharge 6 kVAir discharge 8 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3Radiated radio-frequency fi elds

80...1000 MHz AM 80% 10 V/m 900 MHz Pulse modulated 10 V/m

•••

•••••

••••

•••

••

••

••••

••

••

13NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010TECHNICAL DATA

Reference standards EN 60255-22-4 IEC 60255-22-4 EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4 Fast transient burst (5/50 ns)

Auxiliary power supply 2 kVInput circuits 4 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-5 EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5High energy pulse

Uaux (line-to-ground 10 ohm, 9 μF) 2 kVUaux (line-to-line 0 ohm, 18 μF) 1 kVI/O ports (line-to-ground 40 ohm, 0.5 μF) 2 kVI/O ports (line-to-line 40 ohm, 0.5 μF) 1 kV

Reference standards EN 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-6 EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6Conducted radio-frequency fi elds

0.15...80 MHz AM 80% 1kHz 10 V

Reference standards EN 60255-22-7 IEC 60255-22-7 EN 61000-4-16 IEC 61000-4-16Power frequency immunity tests

Dc voltage 30 V50 Hz continuously 30 V50 Hz 1 s 300 V0.015...150 kHz 30 V

Reference standards EN 61000-4-8 IEC 61000-4-8Magnetic fi eld 50 Hz

50 Hz continuously 100 A/m50 Hz 1 s 1 kA/m

Reference standards EN 61000-4-10 IEC 61000-4-10Damped oscillatory magnetic fi eld

Damped oscillatory wave 0.1 MHz 30 A/m• Damped oscillatory wave 1 MHz 30 A/m

Emission

Reference standards EN 60255-25 IEC 60255-25 EN 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-6-4 EN 55011 CISPR 11Electromagnetic emission tests

Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.15...0.5 MHz 79 dB μVConducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.5...30 MHz 73 dB μVRadiated emission 30...230 MHz 40 dB μV/m

• Radiated emission 230...1000 MHz 47 dB μV/m

Mechanical testsReference standards EN 60255-21-1 EN 60255-21-2 RMEC01Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment

EN 60255-21-1 Vibration tests (sinusoidal) Class 1• EN 60255-21-2 Shock and bump test Class 1

Climatic tests

Reference standards IEC 60068-x ENEL R CLI 01 CEI 50Operating temperature -25...+70 °CStorage temperature -40...+85 °CPermissible relative humidity 10...95 %Atmospheric pressure 70...110 kPa

Safety

Reference standards EN 61010-1Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory usePollution degree 3Reference voltage 250 VOvervoltage category III

Certifi cationsReference standardsProduct standard for measuring relays EN 50263 CE Conformity

EMC Directive 89/336/EECLow Voltage Directive 73/23/EECType tests IEC 60255-6

••

••••

•

••••

••

•

•••

•

•••


3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS

Auxiliary power supply U aux VoltageNominal value (range)[1] 24...230 V~/-Operative range 19...265 V~/19...300 V-

Inrush current (max)24 V- 3 A, 1 ms48 V- 5 A, 1 ms110 V- 10 A, 1 ms230 V~ 40 A, 1 ms

Frequency (for alternate voltage supply) 45...66 HzMax distortion factor ( for alternating voltage supply) 15%Max alternating component (for dc voltage supply):

Full wave rectifi ed sine wave 100 %Sine wave 80 %

Power consumption: Maximum (energized relays, three LEDs, backlight ON) 4.5 W (UAUX = 24 V-)

• Maximum (energized relays, three LEDs, backlight ON) 9 VA (UAUX = 230 V~)

Phase current input circuitsStandard CTs:

Connections M4 terminalsRelay nominal phase current In 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP-switchPermanent overload 25 AThermal overload (1 s) 500 ADynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 ARated consumption (for any phase) ≤ 0.002 VA with In=1 A ≤ 0.04 VA with In=5 A

LPCT - Low Power Current Transformers:Connections RJ45 plugRelay nominal phase current In 100 AExtended primary current 50 A...1250 A selectable by DIP-switchMax primary current 12.5 kANominal secondary voltage (with Inp = 100 A) 22.5 mV

Residual current input circuit[2]

Relay nominal residual current IEn 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP-switch Permanent overload 25 AThermal overload (1 s) 500 ADynamic overload (half cycle) 1250 ARated consumption ≤ 0.006 VA with IEn=1 A ≤ 0.12 VA with IEn=5 A

Binary input circuitsQuantity 2Type optocouplerOperative range 24...265 V~/-Min activation voltage UDIGmin 18 VMax consumption, energized 3 mA

3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS

Output relaysQuantity 4Type of contacts changeover (SPDT, type C) Nominal current 8 ANominal voltage/max switching voltage 250 V~/400 V~Breaking capacity:

Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) 50 W (K1, K2 trip)Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) 30 W (K3, K4 signalling)Alternating current (λ = 0,4) 1250 VA

Make 1000 W/VAShort duration current (0,5 s) 30 AMinimum switching load 300 mW (5 V/ 5 mA)Life:

Mechanical 106 operationsElectrical 105 operationsMinimum pulse width (K1tTR...K4tTR) 0.01...0.50 s (step 0.01 s)

Note 1 The different versions must be select on order

Note 2 The residual current input is available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions

••••

••

•

•••

•


3.4 MMI

Display 16x2 LCD backlight module

LEDs Quantity 8

ON/fail (green) 1Start (yellow) 1Trip (red) 1Trip I>, I>>, I>>> (red) 1Trip IE>, IE>> (red) 152a - Circuit Breaker closed (red) 152b - Circuit Breaker open (red) 1TCS - Trip Circuit Supervision (red) 1

Keyboard 8 keys

3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

Local portConnection RJ10Baud rate 19200 bpsParity NoneProtocol Modbus RTU®

Remote ports

RS485Connection screw terminalsBaud rate 1200...57600 bpsProtocol[1] ModBus®RTU

IEC 60870-5-103

3.6 GENERAL SETTINGS

Relay nominal frequency fn 50, 60 HzPhase CT primary nominal current Inp [2] 1 A...1250 A 1...99 A (step 1 A) 100...1250 A (step 5 A)Residual CT primary nominal current IEnp [3] 1 A...1000 A 1...99 A (step 1 A) 100...1000 A (step 5 A)

3.7 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

Phase overcurrent - 50/51I> Element

I> Curve type (I>Curve)[4] DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEEE MI, VI, EII CLP> Activation time (tCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)I> Reset time delay (t>RES) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Note 1 The different versions must be select on order

Note 2 The rated phase current settings doesn’t concern the 50/51 protection elements; they must agree with nominal primary current for traditional CT inputs or dip-switch 50...1250 A for LPCT inputs for a right reading of the phase current primary values (Reading Direct).

Note 3 The rated residual current settings doesn’t concern the 50N/51N protection elements; they must agree with nominal primary current of the CT inputs for a right reading of the residual current primary values (Reading Direct).

For the NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx1 versions (no residual current input circuit), the parameter is meaningless

Note 4 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1] Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t>inv · 0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023 Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t>inv · 3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098 Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t>inv · 5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024 t : operate time I> inv: pickup value t>inv: operate time setting Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I>inv Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20

••••••••

•••


Defi nite time50/51 First threshold defi nite time (I>def) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In)I>def within CLP (ICLP>def) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In)I>def I>def Operating time (t>def) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Inverse time[1]

50/51 First threshold inverse time (I>inv) 0.100...2.50 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...2.50 In (step 0.01 In)I>inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.100...10.00 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In)I>inv I>inv Operating time (t>inv) 0.02...60.0 s 0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)

I>> ElementICLP>> Activation time (tCLP>>def) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)I>> Reset time delay (t>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Defi nite time50/51 Second threshold defi nite time (I>>def) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In)I>>def within CLP (ICLP>def) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In)I>>def Operating time (t>>def) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

I>>> ElementICLP>>> Activation time (tCLP>>>def) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)I>>> Reset time delay (t>>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Defi nite time50/51 Third threshold defi nite time (I>>>def) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In)I>>>def Operating time (t>>>def) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup time ≤ 0.03 sDropout ratio 0.95...0.98Dropout time ≤ 0.04 sOvershoot time 0.03 sPickup accuracy ± 4% ± 1% InOperate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1] Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = t>inv · 0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023 Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t>inv · 3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098 Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t>inv · 5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024 I-squared-t (I 2t = K): t = 16 · t>inv / (I/I>inv)2

Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · t>inv / [-0.236 · (I/I>inv)-1+ 0.339] RECTIFIER (RI): t = 2351 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6- 1] t : operate time I> inv: pickup value t>inv: operate time setting Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I>inv Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20 With I> inv pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In


Residual overcurrent - 50N/51NIE> Element

IE> Curve type (IE>Curve) DEFINITE IEC/BS A, B, C ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EIIECLP> Activation time (tECLP>) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)IE> Reset time delay (tE>RES) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Defi nite time50N/51N First threshold defi nite time (IE>def) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)IE>def within CLP (IECLP>def) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)IE>def Operating time (tE>def) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Inverse time[1]

50N/51N First threshold inverse time (IE>inv) 0.005...2.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)IE>inv Operating time (tE>inv) 0.02...60.0 s 0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s)

IE>> ElementIECLP>> Activation time (tECLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)IE>> Reset time delay (tE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Defi nite time50N/51N Second threshold defi nite time (IE>>def) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)IE>>def within CLP (IECLP>>def) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn)IE>>def Operating time (tE>>def) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Pickup time ≤ 0.03 sDropout ratio 0.95...0.98Dropout time ≤ 0.04 sOvershoot time 0.03 sPickup accuracy ± 4% ± 1% IEnOperate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

Breaker FailureBF Time delay (tBF) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.05 s) 1.0...0.99 s (step 0.01 s)Operate time accuracy 5% or ± 10 ms

Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · tE>inv / [(IE/ IE> inv)0.02 - 1] Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · tE>inv / [(IE/IE> inv) - 1] Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · tE>inv / [(IE/IE> inv)2 - 1] Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = tE>inv · 0.01 / [(IE/IE> inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023 Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = tE>inv · 3.922 / [(IE/IE> inv)2 - 1] + 0.098 Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = tE>inv · 5.64 / [(IE/IE> inv)2 - 1] + 0.024 Electromechanical (EM): t = 0.28 · tE>inv / [-0.236 · (IE/IE> inv)-1+ 0.339] IE: residual current input t : operate time IE> inv : pickup value tE>inv: operate time setting Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 IE> Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Equation is valid for 1.1 ≤ IE/ IE> inv ≤ 20


3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING

Automatic reclose (79)79 Function mode 79 Mode Rapid - Rapid+SlowNumber of delayed reclosures N .DAR 0...5Rapid reclosure dead time trdt 0.1...60 s 0.0...19.9 s step 0.1 s, 20..60 s step 1 sSlow reclosure dead time tsdt 1...200 s (step 1 s)Reclaim time tr 1...200 s (step 1 s)Slow reclosure fault discrimination time td 1...10 s (step 1 s)

Circuit Breaker monitoringCircuit breaker diagnostic

Diagnostic (CB check) 52a/52b - 52a - 52b

Oscillography (DFR)Format COMTRADENumber of records 2Recording mode circularSampling rate 16 samples / power

Set trigger:Pre-trigger time 0...63 T[1] [2]

Trigger inputs IN1, IN2, IN3Triggeroutputs K1...K4Manual Trigger ThySetterGeneral Trigger general from start / trips Start, TripTrigger from start / trips Start I>, I>>, ...Trip I>...

Set analog channels:Analog 1...Analog 4

Instantaneous currents value iL1, iL2, iL3, iEPhase currents IL1, IL2, IL3Residual current IE

Set digital channels:Inputs IN1, IN2, IN3Outputs K1...K4General trigger from start / trip General Start, General Trip

3.9 MEASURES

MeasuresRMS value of the fundamental component for phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)RMS value of the fundamental component for residual current (IE)

Digital inputsIN1 - 52b On - OffIN2 - 52a On - OffIN3 - 79 On - Off - external Trip

Automatic Reclose79 Active Mode On - Off79 Cycle State Reset - On - Off79 Run On - Off79 Residual time 79 Last event

Circuit BreakerPosition Open - Closed - Unknown

Note 1 - T = number of power cyclesExampile, with setting T=4 the pre-trigger is 80 ms with f = 50 Hz

••••••

•••

•••

19NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

4 F U N C T I O N C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S4 F U N C T I O N C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S

4.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

The following fi gure illustrates the basic structure of the relay.

Printed boards hold the circuit components arranged according to a modular allocation of the main functions.

Power supply boardAll the components necessary for conversion and stabilization functions are provided.Input range: 24...230 V. The circuit provides stabilized voltages of +10 V and -10 V, required for the analogue measurement, +24 V for relays and +5 V for supplying the digital circuits. The circuit board additionally comprises:INPUT CIRCUITS:

Three binary input circuits, The logical input circuits and the block circuits include photo-couplers which provide for galvanic separation. OUTPUT CIRCUITS:

One block output circuit (BLOUT 1),Four output relays (k1...K4).

•

••

hw.ai

RTC

CPU BOARD

POWER SUPPLY BOARD

INPUT MODULE

CTs

DSP

1A/5A

≈≈≈≈

EEprom

RS48

5

RELAYS

K1...K4 Output contacts

RS232

MMILCD

LEDs

BINARY INPUTS

IN1

InputIN2

IN3

POWER SUPPLY

+5 V

+10

V

0 V

+24

V-1

0 V

POW

ER F

AIL

RESE

T

Uaux

≈≈≈ L

PCTs

CUR

REN

T IN

PUTSIL1

IL2

IL3

L1

L2

SettingLPCT

800 A400 A

200 A100 A

50 A

L3

In=50...1250A

hw.ai

RTC

CPU BOARD

POWER SUPPLY BOARD

INPUT MODULE

CTs

DSP

1A/5A

≈≈≈≈

EEprom

RS48

5

RELAYS

K1...K4 Output contacts

RS232

MMILCD

LEDs

BINARY INPUTS

IN1

InputIN2

IN3

POWER SUPPLY

+5 V

+10

V

0 V

+24

V-1

0 V

POW

ER F

AIL

RESE

T

Uaux

≈≈≈ L

PCTs

CUR

REN

T IN

PUTSIL1

IL2

IL3

L1

L2

SettingLPCT

800 A400 A

200 A100 A

50 A

L3

In=50...1250A

2020 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS

CPU boardThis circuit board contains all the circuits necessary for performing the analogue and digital pro-cessing of the signals.

Analog processingThe following are envisaged:

Anti aliasing fi lter circuits, .Amplifi er circuits for conditioning the input signals, Reference voltage adjustment circuits for the measurement A/D converter.

The relays uses a DSP processor operating at 40 MHzThe input currents are sampled at a frequency of 64 samples per period by means of a dual conversion system which allows the attainment of infor-mation pertaining to polarity and amplitude with high resolution. The measurement criterion allows precise measurement of even those signals having a unidirectional component, such as transient currents with overlapping exponential, which typically appear during faults. The circuit board also houses the output relays with the corresponding command and control cir-cuits, communication circuits, buttons, LCD display, LEDs and the key switch.

CPUA 32 bit DSP is provided. The following are envisaged:

Real Time Clock circuits with oscillator and super capacitor,RS232 communication port,RS485 communication port,

Memories:Ram: high speed static memoryFlash memory,EEprom memory: used for calibration data storage,

Input boardPhase current inputs

Traditional CTsThree phase current inputs with secondary nominal currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches.Low power CTsThree phase current inputs with primary nominal currents independently selectable through DIP-switches and software.

Residual current inputMeasured residual currentOne residual current input with secondary nominal current selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches.Calculated residual currentResidual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors.

MMI (keyboard, LED and display)The MMI module (Man Machine Interface) includes:

An eight keys 8 keyboard,a backlight 16x2 LCD display,Eight signalling LEDs,RS232 communication port.

•••

•••

•••

••••


4.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION

The program which handles operation of the Pro-N relays is made up of three fundamental elements shown in the following block diagram.

KernelThe kernel represents the nucleus of the system: it includes the processing functions closest to the electronic circuits; particularly the algorithms providing for the generation of the synchronisms (tim-ers) for sampling the analogue signals and numerical processing. The software is structured with interrupts operating with various priority levels in a non “pre-emp-tive” task system. By means of Discrete Fourier Transform calculation, based on 64 samples/period, information is deduced in relation to the amplitude and phase of all the current measurements; these are constantly updated and at the disposal of all the protection and control application algorithms. In addition, the kernel manages a service communication protocol known as Basic Protocol (BP).

DriversThe driver library contains all the specialised modules for the command and control functions which make up the connection ring between the kernel and the application. Examples of drivers include the Modbus communication and LCD display modules.

ApplicationThe application contains all the elements which carry out the protection and control functions. The main modules are:

- diagnostic function,- input management (logical inputs and block signal), - protective functions, - event recording, - output management (output relays, LEDs and block signals).

Each element (Kernel, Drivers and Application) may, in turn, be split into modules:

Base protocol (kernel)The module known as the Basic Protocol (BP) manages the service communication between the kernel and the other modules through the communication buses:

- direct for internal functional call,- SPI over synchronous serial, - SCI over asynchronous serial. The activities which may be performed by means of BP include:

- measurement confi guration ,- measurement reading,- measurement enabling.

Calibration (kernel)Calibration is performed using the base protocol functions for coordinating the calibration and test-ing stages with the automatic testing equipment (ATE).

Communication (drivers)The protective device implements the MODBUS RTU protocol for communicating via the RS232 inter-face with the ThySetter setting software and via the RS485 interface with the fi eld bus. All major codes according to the Modbus standard are envisaged; for a complete description and map of the addresses, please refer to the appendix mentioned further in this manual.

MMI (drivers)This handles the menus, available both on the panel and by means of Modbus messages, which may be run from commands using the keyboard, LEDs and LCD display. MMI information is stored in EEPROM and may be loaded remotely by means of the basic protocol functions.

APPLICATION

DRIVERS

timers

KERNELsampling

APPLICATION

DRIVERS

timers

KERNELsampling


Data Base (application/drivers)Using modular criteria, the database is structured in three sections:

- RAM containing the volatile data, - REE and PAR containing the data recorded in non-volatile memory. Duplication of the data into two memory banks is envisaged with a continuous control system based on the cross checking of the consistency of the stored data. Modification of the calibration pa-rameters is split into two stages; in particular, data undergoing modification is placed in temporary memory and subsequently confirmed permanently (Store command) or discarded (Clear command). Instead, the area identified as REE is set aside for recording data which does not require the Store command for storage, or date written directly by the application (e.g.: counters,...)

Self-test (application)This function cyclically monitors the operation of the main hardware and software functions without affecting the process cycle with any signifi cant delays. In particular, the functions monitored are the following,

- the reference voltage levels,- output relay coil continuity, - the program fl ow control by monitoring the execution times and stack area occupancy,- checking the pilot wires (accelerated logic system), - the consistency of the data in the REE and PAR blocks, duplicated in the EEPROM.

Development toolsFor the development of the project, a CASE instrument has been developed, responsible for the opti-mized production of software code for the management of collaboration, the database and the MMI data and the Xml files used for communication. The automatic code generation criteria ensures the quality of the result in terms of the reusability, verifiability and maintainability of the software life cycle.


4.3 I/O DESCRIPTION

Metering inputsThe following input are provided:

Three phase current inputs for traditional CTs or LPCTs (Low Power Current Transformers).One residual current input available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions.The nominal currents are independently adjustable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches (CTs inputs).

The input circuits are dimensioned in order to withstand the currents which arise when a fault oc-curs, both in transient and steady state condition.

Signal processingVarious processing levels are involved:

Acquisition (base level).Direct measures of physical channels (fi rst level).Calculated measures (second level).Derived (third level).

The measures concerning a level are based on data worked out in the previous level.For each level the required resources concerning the priority for tasks (conditioning circuits, DSP) are on hand.

ACQUISITION (base level)The input signals are sampled 24 times per power cycle

- iL1...iL3 phase currents instantaneous value- iE residual current instantaneous value

From the sampled quantities, several measures are computed for protection, monitoring and meter-ing purposes.

Samples are processed by means DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and the phase and amplitude of fundamental are computed:

Phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3

Residual current IE[1]

Note 1 The residual current input is available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions; when input is unavailable, the residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors.

•••

••••

•

•

sensor i .a i

NA011

3 phase CT current inputs

3 phase LPCT current inputs

Residual current input

sensor i .a i

NA011



Residual current input

acquis i t ion.ai

ACQUISITION

INSTANTANEOUS VALUES≈

acquis i t ion.ai

ACQUISITION

INSTANTANEOUS VALUES≈

IL1 .a i

(In)

ACQUISITION

iL1, iL2, iL3DFT

≈IL1, IL2, IL3



IL1 .a i

(In)

ACQUISITION

iL1, iL2, iL3DFT

≈IL1, IL2, IL3



IE .a i

(IEn)

ACQUISITION

iEDFT

CT

≈ IE

IE .a i

(IEn)

ACQUISITION

iEDFT

CT

≈ IE


Fundamental component of the calculated residual current IE[1]

Use of measured values

Note 1 In versions with CT input, the residual current is available as a direct measure IE, while versions without residual current input the residual cur-rent is only available as a calculated measure

•

IEC.a i

IL1

IE = IL1 + IL2 + IL3IE

IL3

IL2(I En)

IEC.a i

IL1

IE = IL1 + IL2 + IL3IE

IL3

IL2(I En)

i L1, i

L2, i

L3

I L1, I

L2, I

L3

i E I E Bin

ary

inpu

t IN

1

inar

y in

put I

N2,

inar

y in

put I

N3

Star

t (ST

ART)

Rel

ay K

1...K

4Tr

ip (T

RIP)

Rel

ay K

1...K

4Sr

art (

STAR

T) L

EDTr

ip (T

RIP)

LED

Trip

(50/

51) L

EDTr

ip (5

0N/5

1N) L

EDTr

ip (C

B OP

EN) L

EDTr

ip (C

B CL

OSED

) LED

79

LED

PROTECTIONPhase overcurrent (50/51) g g g g g gResidual overcurrent (50N/51N) g g g g g g

CONTROL & MONITORINGCircuit Breaker Position (52b) g g gCircuit Breaker Position (52a) g g gAutomatic Reclose (79) g gDiagnosticProtection statesInput statesOutput states

MEASURESPhase current gResidual current g

EVENT RECORDINGEvent 0 g g g g gEvent 1 g g g g gEvent ... g g g g gEvent 99 g g g g g

FAULT RECORDINGFault 0 g g g g gFault 1 g g g g gFault ... g g g g gFault 19 g g g g g

OSCILLOGRAPHYRecord 1 g g g g g g g g gRecord 2 g g g g g g g g g


Binary inputsThree binary inputs are available.The dry inputs must be powered with an external voltage, (usually the auxiliary power supply).The connections are shown in the schematic diagrams.

Every input is customized for a defi ned function.

FUNCTIONBinary input

IN1 IN2 IN3

52a (auxiliary CB contact) g

52b (auxiliary CB contact) g

79 (Automatic reclosing) g

52a and 52bThe CB position can be acquired by means of binary inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts: the information is used to acquire the CB position (open-closed-fault).

79Automatic reclosing enable/external trip .The exhaustive treatment of the 79 function is described in the concerning paragraph.

CB positionCB diagnostic

52a52

52b

+UAUX

-UAUX

IN2

IN1

Binary input allocation for CB state acquisition

CB positionCB diagnostic

52a52

52b

+UAUX

-UAUX

IN2

IN1

Binary input allocation for CB state acquisition

79 Enable orExternal TRIP +UAUX

-UAUX

NA011

Binary input IN3 Towards 79 log ic

Automatic reclosing - 79

79 IN3 select

79 Enable orExternal TRIP +UAUX

-UAUX

NA011

Binary input IN3 Towards 79 log ic

Automatic reclosing - 79

79 IN3 select


Output relaysFour output relays are available (K1...K4) with two changeover contacts (SPDT, type C):[1]

K1 and K2 are trip relays.K3, K4 are signalling relays.[2]

Each output relay may be programmed with following operating mode:Operation MODE (No latched, Latched).Logic (Energized/De-energized).

To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (Minimum pulse width parameter).All parameters are available inside the Set \ Relays menu.

Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for each relay.Notes:

When de-energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in rest condition if no trip command is in progress.When energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in operating condition if no trip command is in progress and the auxiliary supply is powered on.When no-latched operating mode is set (Kx Mode No-latched), the output relay reset at the end of the trip condition. To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (minimum pulse width operation).When latched operating mode is set Kx Mode Latched, the output relay doesn’t reset at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a reset command is issued (RESET key, ThySetter or com-munication command).It is advisable to make sure that the output contact technical data are suitable for load (Nominal current, breaking capacity, make current, switching voltage,...).

Matching every output relay to any protective element is freely programmable inside the Setpoints submenus according a tripping matrix structure.[3][4]

FUNCTIONRELAY

K1 K2 K3 K4Self-test relay g g g g

I> Start relays (Start I>) g g g g

I> Trip relays (Trip I>) g g g g

I>> Start relays (Start I>>) g g g g

I>> Trip relays (Trip I>>) g g g g

I>>> Start relays (Start I>>>) g g g g

I>>> Trip relays (Trip I>>>) g g g g

IE> Start relays (Start IE>) g g g g

IE> Trip relays (Trip IE>) g g g g

IE>> Start relays (Start IE>>) g g g g

IE>> Trip relays (Trip IE>>) g g g g

79 Close g g g g

79 Run g g g g

79 Fail g g g g

CB Close g g g g

CB Open g g g g

Self test CB g g g g

Note 1 Schematic diagram are shown inside APPENDIX B1.

Note 2 Reduced breaking capacity for the K3 and K4 relays compared to that of relay K1 and K2.

Note 3 Matching of the output relay to the protective and control functions can be defi ned so that any collision from other function is avoided. All output relay are unassigned in the default setting.

Note 4 Self test relay: it is advisable to plan the following settings: - Energized operating mode, - No-latched , in order that it stays ON for normal conditions and the other way round it goes OFF if any fault is detected and/or the auxiliary supply turns OFF.

••

••

•

•

•

•

•

Input

No-latched operation

Latched operation

Output relay operation Relay-operat ion-t imers.ai

t

Minimum pulse widthtTR

Input

No-latched operation

Latched operation

Output relay operation Relay-operat ion-t imers.ai

t

Minimum pulse widthtTR


LED indicatorsEight LEDs are available.

One green LED “ON”: if turned on it means that the device is properly working, if fl ashing the inter-nal self-test function has detected an anomaly.One yellow LED “START” tagged for START of one or more protective elements. (I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>)One red LED “TRIP” tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements (I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>).One red LED 1, latched, tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements I>, I>>, I>>>One red LED 2, latched, tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements IE>, IE>>One red LED 3, no latched, tagged for binary input state visualization 52a (CB position)One red LED 4, no latched, tagged for binary input state visualization 52b (CB position)One red LED 5, no latched, tagged for binary input state visualization 79.

FUNCTIONSLED

START TRIP 1 2 3 4 5

Start I> g

Trip I> g g

Start I>> g

Trip I>> g g

Start I>>> g

Trip I>>> g g

Start IE> g

Trip IE> g g

Start IE>> g

Trip IE>> g g g

79 State g g

CB OPEN g

CB CLOSED g

•

•

••••••

Start

79 (79 State)CB CLOSED (52b)CB OPEN (52a)

50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>> elements)50N-51N (IE>, IE>> elements)

Trip

Open CB

Close CB

Start

79 (79 State)CB CLOSED (52b)CB OPEN (52a)

50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>> elements)50N-51N (IE>, IE>> elements)

Trip

Open CB

Close CB


Communication interfacesTwo communication ports are provided:

RS232 port on the front side for local communication (ThySetter).RS485 port on the rear side for bus communication.

RS232A simple DIN to RJ adapter can be used; the L10041 cable can be supplied.The RS232 port has high priority compared with the RS485 port.

If RS232 port is not available on Personal Computer, an USB-RS232 converter must be employed.[1]

The serial port is the simplest access for setting by means the ThySetter software.RS485

Two protocol are implemented:ModBus RTU. Modbus is a serial communications protocol. It is a de facto standard communica-tions protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly available means of connecting industrial electronic devices also inside electric utilities and substation. IEC 60870-5. The IEC 60870-5 suite of protocol is used for communications from master station to substation, as well within the substation; the IEC 60870-5-103 (Protection equipment) is available together the Modbus protocol on some version of Pro-n devices (code NA011#xCxx).

Note 1 After installation, the same communication port must be selected to defi ne the Thysetter parameters (typically COM4, COM5,...).

••

•

•

ser ia l -sch.ai

L10041

TXD

RXD

DTR

GND

4

3

1

2

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

95

Female connector

RJ10 Connector Pin1

ser ia l -sch.ai

L10041

TXD

RXD

DTR

GND

4

3

1

2

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

95

Female connector

RJ10 Connector Pin1


4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS

Traditional CT inputsRelay phase nominal current InThis nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary CTs nominal current.Dip-switches are located on the CPU board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is described in the “6.4 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn” paragraph.

Relay residual nominal current IEnFor NA011#xxx2 versions, the rated value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary nominal current of the residual CT. Dip-switch is located on the CPU board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is described in the

“6.4 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn” paragraph.For NA011#xxx0 versions, the rated value is automatically set to the phase nominal current.[1]

Low Power CT inputsRelay phase nominal current InThis nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 50 A to 1250 A, same as the primary nominal current of the protected plant. All settings of the current thresholds are referred to the rated cur-rent of the relay In, that corresponds to the primary value automatically set as just described.Dip-switches are located on the rear board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is described in the “6.5 NOMINAL CURRENT In SETTING FOR LPCT” paragraph.

Relay residual nominal current IEnFor NA011#xxx3 versions, the rated value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary nominal current of the residual CT. Dip-switch is located on board of the CPU board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is de-scribed in the “6.4 and 6.5 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn” paragraph.For NA011#xxx1 versions, the rated value is automatically set to the phase nominal current.[1]

SettingsInside the Set \ Base menu the following parameters can be set:

Primary rated values (phase and residual), employed for measures relative to primary values.Measurements reading mode (Reading Direct or Relative).

Phase CT primary current InpThis parameter affects the measure of the phase currents when the primary measurement reading mode is selected (Reading Direct). It must be programmed to the same value of the phase CT primary nominal current Traditional CTs) or to the value set for the LPCT inputs.

Example

The phase CT primary current Inp must be set as: Inp = 500 A

Residual CT primary current IEnpThis parameter affects the measure of the residual current when the primary measurement read-ing mode is selected with traditional CTs inputs. It must be programmed to the same value of the residual CTs primary nominal current.

Example 1

The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 ANote 1 The residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents.

•

••

•

•

••

•

••

•

•

Es-In.ai

KCT = 500A/5A=100

52

In

NA011

IL1...IL3

LPC

Ts C

URRE

NT

INPU

TSL1

L2

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

LPCT Setting

800 A400 A

200 A100 A

50 A

L3

In=50...1250A

1A/5A

Es-In.ai

KCT = 500A/5A=100

52

In

NA011

IL1...IL3

LPC

Ts C

URRE

NT

INPU

TSL1

L2

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

LPCT Setting

800 A400 A

200 A100 A

50 A

L3

In=50...1250A

1A/5A

Es1-IEn.ai

1x KTA = 100 A /1 A

52

IEn= 1 A

NA011

Es1-IEn.ai

1x KTA = 100 A /1 A

52

IEn= 1 A

NA011


Example 2

The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 AExample 3

The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 500 A

Measurement reading mode- With Reading Relative setting all measures are related to the nominal value,- With Reading Direct setting all measures are related to the primary value.

•

Es2-IEn.ai

3xKTA = 100A / 5A

52

IEn= 5 A

NA011

Es2-IEn.ai

3xKTA = 100A / 5A

52

IEn= 5 A

NA011

Es3-In.ai

KCT = 500A/5A=100

52

In

NA011

IL1...IL3

LPC

Ts C

URRE

NT

INPU

TS

L1

L2

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

LPCT Setting

800 A400 A

200 A100 A

50 A

L3

In=50...1250A

1A/5A

Es3-In.ai

KCT = 500A/5A=100

52

In

NA011

IL1...IL3

LPC

Ts C

URRE

NT

INPU

TS

L1

L2

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

In = 500 A

LPCT Setting

800 A400 A

200 A100 A

50 A

L3

In=50...1250A

1A/5A


Phase overcurrent - 50/51Preface

Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable (I>, I>>, I>>>) with adjustable delay (t>, t>>, t>>>).The fi rst one may be programmed with inverse time according the IEC 60255-3/BS142 standard.The second and third thresholds have a defi nite time characteristic.For the defi nite time thresholds a reset time can be set (t>>RES, t>>>RES) useful to reduce the clearing time for intermittent faults.

Operation and settingsEach phase fundamental frequency current is compared with the setting value. Currents above the associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element it is restored.The fi rst threshold (I>) may be programmed with defi nite or inverse time according the following characteristic curves:

Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1]Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1]Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1]

Where:t: operate timeI>inv: threshold settingt>inv: operate time setting

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>invMinimum operate time: 0.1 sRange where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ I/I>inv ≤ 20

For all defi nite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 40 In for traditional CT input versions or 12.5 kA (primary current) for LPCT input versions (e.g. 25 In with In = 500 A).All overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting the relative start and/or trip output to a selectable relay inside the Set \ Relays menu.The fi rst overcurrent element can be programmed with inverse time characteristic by setting the I>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C) available inside the Set \ 50/51 menu.An adjustable reset time delay is provided for second and third threshold (t>>RES, t>>>RES).

Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point

•••

•••

t - int-F50-51.ai

II>>def I>>>def

I>inv

t>>>def

t>>def

I>inv

t

General operation time characteristic for the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51

TRIP

t - int-F50-51.ai

II>>def I>>>def

I>inv

t>>>def

t>>def

I>inv

t

General operation time characteristic for the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51

TRIPTRIP

Timers-F50-51.ai

I>> Start

I>> Trip

t>>def t>>def

RESET

INPUT

t>>RES t>>RES t>>RES

tI>> element phase overcurrent timers - 50/51 Timers-F50-51.ai

I>> Start

I>> Trip

t>>def t>>def

RESET

INPUT

t>>RES t>>RES t>>RES

tI>> element phase overcurrent timers - 50/51


Each overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the BF enable parameters are set to Trip I> and/or Trip I>> inside the Set \ Breaker failure menu.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may be blocked for an adjustable time interval (tCLP>, tCLP>> parameters adjustable inside the Set \ 50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element) \ Setpoints menu), starting from the circuit breaker closure.This operating mode may be select by setting On-Blocking the ICLP>, ICLP>> parameters.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.This operating mode (ON-Changing = ICLP>, ICLP>>) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tCLP>, tCLP>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Ele-ment) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( ICLP>def, ICLP>def, ICLP>>def) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element) \ Defi nite time (In-verse time) menus.

Fun_50-51S1.ai

I L1

I L2

t >RES

T0

RESET

t >

0T≥1

t >def

I >def I >inv

t >inv

t >RES

Star t I>

Tr ip I>

CB-State

(P ickup wi th in CLP)

(P ickup outs ide CLP)

T 0t CLP>

ICLP>Mode

I C L P >def

t C L P >

I C L P >inv

I L1 ≥ I>

I L1 ≥ I>

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) I>BF

towards BF logic I> BF&Trip I>

TRIP

PING

MAT

RIX

(L

ED+R

ELAY

S)

I> Curve

0T

ABC

A =“1”A =“0 or OFF”

Output t CLP>

I L3

tCLP>

CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN

Output tCLP>

t

0.1 s

HIGH THRESHOLD/BLOCK

LOW THRESHOLD/UNBLOCK


A = ON - Change settingB = OFFC = ON - Element blocking

I>TR-K I>TR-L

I>ST-L I>ST-K

Phase overcurrent (50/51) - First element logic diagram (I>)


Fun_50-51S2.ai

I L1

I L2

t >>RES

T0

RESET

t >>def

0T≥1

t >>def

I >>def

t >>RES

Star t I>>

Tr ip I>>

CB-State



T 0t CLP>>

ICLP>>Mode

I C L P >>def

t C L P >>

I L1 ≥ I>> def

I L1 ≥ I>> def

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) I>>BF

towards BF logic I>> BF&Trip I>>

TRIP

PING

MAT

RIX

(L

ED+R

ELAY

S)

ABC

A =“1”A =“0 or OFF”

Output t CLP>>

I L3

tCLP>>


Output tCLP>>

t

0.1 s





I>>TR-K I>>TR-L

I>>ST-L I>>ST-K

Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Second element logic diagram (I>>)

Fun_50-51S3.ai

I L1

I L2

t >>>RES

T0

RESET

t >>>def

0T≥1

t >>>def

I >>>def

t >>>RES

Star t I>>

Tr ip I>>>

CB-State



T 0t CLP>>>

ICLP>>>Mode

I C L P >>def

t C L P >>>

I L1 ≥ I>>> def

I L1 ≥ I>>> def

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) I>>>BF

towards BF logic I>>> BF&Trip I>>>

TRIP

PING

MAT

RIX

(L

ED+R

ELAY

S)

ABC

A =“1”A =“0 or OFF”

Output t CLP>>>

I L3

tCLP>>>


Output tCLP>>>

t

0.1 s





I>>>TR-K I>>>TR-L

I>>>ST-L I>>>ST-K

Phase overcurrent (50/51) - third element logic diagram (I>>>)


Residual overcurrent - 50N/51NPreface

The residual current is:Measured for NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions from one residual current input with second-ary nominal current selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches or,

Calculated for NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx1 versions by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors.Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable (IE>, IE>> with adjustable delay (tE>, tE>>) are available; the fi rst one (IE>) may be programmed with defi nite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standard curves, the second threshold (IE>>) operates with independent time.

Operation and settingsThe residual fundamental frequency current) is compared with the setting value. Current above the associated pickup value is detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element it is restored.The fi rst threshold (IE>) may be programmed with defi nite or inverse time according the following characteristic curves:

Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 · tE>inv / [(IE/IE>inv)0.02 - 1]Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 · tE>inv / [(IE/IE>inv) - 1]Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 · tE>inv / [(IE/IE>inv)2 - 1] Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): t = tE>inv · 0.01 / [(IE/IE>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = tE>inv · 3.922 / [(IE/IE>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = tE>inv · 5.64 / [(IE/IE>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024

where:t: operate timeIE >: pickup valuetE >inv: operate time setting

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IE>Minimum operate time: 0.1 sRange where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 ≤ IE/IE>inv ≤ 20 If IE>inv pickup ≥ 2.5 IEn, the upper limit is 10 IEn

For all defi nite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 10 IEn.

All elements can be enabled or disabled by setting the relative start and/or trip output to a selectable relay inside the Set \ Relays menu.For each threshold a reset time can be set (tE>RES, tE>>RE) useful to reduce the clearing time for intermittent faults.


•

••••••

••••

IEIE>>

t E>

t E>>

IE>

t

TRIP

General operation time characteristic for the residual overcurrent elements - 50N/51N

IEIE>>

t E>

t E>>

IE>

t

TRIP

General operation time characteristic for the residual overcurrent elements - 50N/51N

Timers-F50N-51N.ai IE> element residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Timers

IE> Start

IE> Trip

tE> tE>

RESET

INPUT

tE>RES tE>RES tE>RES

t

Timers-F50N-51N.ai IE> element residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Timers

IE> Start

IE> Trip

tE> tE>

RESET

INPUT

tE>RES tE>RES tE>RES

t


Each residual overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the BF enable param-eters are set to Trip IE> and/or Trip IE>> inside the Set \ Breaker failure menu.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may be blocked for an adjustable time interval (tECLP>, tECLP>> parameters adjustable inside the Set \ 50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element) \ Setpoints menu), starting from the circuit breaker closure.This operating mode may be select by setting On-Blocking the IECLP>, IECLP>> parameters.

If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure.This operating mode (ON-Changing = IECLP>, IECLP>>) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tECLP>, tECLP>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( IECLP>def, IECLP>def ,IECLP>>def) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Ele-ment) \ Defi nite time (Inverse time) menus.

Fun_50N-51NS1.ai

t >RES

T0

RESET

t E>

0T

t E>def

t E>inv

t E>RES

Star t IE>

Tr ip IE>

CB-StateT 0

t ECLP>

IECLP>Mode

t EC L P >

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) IE>BF

towards BF logic IE> BF&Trip IE>

TRIP

PING

MAT

RIX

(L

ED+R

ELAY

S)

IE> Curve

0T

ABC

A =“1”A =“0 or OFF”

Output t ECLP>

tECLP>


Output tECLP>

t

0.1 s





IE>TR-K IE>TR-L

IE>ST-L IE>ST-K

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - First element logic diagram (IE>)

I E

≥1



I EC L P >def I EC L P >inv

I E ≥ I ECLP>

&

State

IE>inv

I E ≥ IE>def

I E ≥ IE>inv

IE>def

&

State


Fun_50N-51NS2.ai

t >RES

T0

RESET

t E>>

0T

t E>>deft E>RES

Star t IE>>

Tr ip IE>>

CB-StateT 0t ECLP>>

IECLP>>Mode

t EC L P >>

BF Enable (ON≡Enable) IE>>BF

towards BF logic IE>> BF&Trip IE>>

TRIP

PING

MAT

RIX

(L

ED+R

ELAY

S)

ABC

A =“1”A =“0 or OFF”

Output t ECLP>>

tECLP>>


Output tECLP>>

t

0.1 s





IE>>TR-K IE>>TR-L

IE>>ST-L IE>>ST-K

Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Second element logic diagram (IE>>)

I E



I EC L P >>def

I E ≥ I ECLP>>

I E ≥ IE>>def

IE>>def


Breaker failure - BFPreface

When the protection issues a trip command but, because an anomaly, the circuit breaker cannot open, the breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit break-ers.The breaker failure function may be started by internal protective function if associated with BF.

Operation and settingsThe starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are fi lled:

Start and trip of internal protective elements (trip of elements matched with BF protection);The CB is closed (the CB state may be acquired by means one or two binary inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b).

If both conditions are held along the set operate time tBF, the BF element trips at deadline, vice versa the timer is cleared and the function is restored.To the purpose to restore the BF element as quickly as possible, with start of the same protection (see A condition), additionally to the trip of some internal protections, their starts are required (start reset is faster than trip reset).

The element may be enabled or disabled by setting OFF, Trip I>, trip I>>, trip IE> or trip IE>> the BF Enable parameter.

The tBF and BF Enable parameters are available inside the Set \ Breaker failure-BF menu.

BF start from Circuit breakerOne or two binary inputs are designed for acquire the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts. The CB check parameter is available inside the Set \ Circuit breaker menu, the 52a, 52b and 52a/52b function is assigned to the selected binary inputs.

A)B)

all-FBF.ai General logic diagram of the breaker failure element - BF

5 2 b

5 2 a

Tr i pS t a r t B FTr i p B F

BF Enable t BF

all-FBF.ai General logic diagram of the breaker failure element - BF

5 2 b

5 2 a

Tr i pS t a r t B FTr i p B F

BF Enable t BF


4.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

Circuit breaker supervisionPreface

By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the CB position is acquired; based on this information a Open and/or Close can be sent safely issued by user.To activate the Auto-reclose function the CB state acquisition must be enabled.The wrong congruity of the auxiliary contact is detected in run time mode (52a and 52b), by means of binary inputs; any failure is detect and stored inside the 100 events (Data Logger).

Operation and settings52a is the auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the same position as the breaker (52a open = CB open). It must be assigned to the IN2 binary input.52b is the auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the opposite position as the breaker (52b open = CB closed)). It must be assigned to the IN1 binary input.The circuit breaker position can be verifi ed by one or two logic inputs, the parameter is available within the Set \ Circuit breaker menu:CB check = 52a/52b: both binary input must be wired to 52a and 52b auxiliary contactsCB check = 52a: the binary input IN2 must be wired to 52a CB check = 52b: the binary input IN1 must be wired to 52b.

With 52a/52b setting, if an inconsistency is verifi ed (eg, IN1 and IN2 are both ON or both OFF) an alarm message is displayed (Position Alarm), the LED 3 and 4 blinks and the output relay Self Test CB switches.With 52a or 52b setting, no inconsistency may be detected

Circuit breaker commandsBy means of the (Open) and (Close) keys the circuit breaker command may be issued.The committed output relays must be enabled inside the Set \ Relays menu.

•••

Fun-CB-position.ai

RELA

YS T

RIPP

ING

MAT

RIX

LED

3, 4

52a ON/OFF

0T

CB check

52b ON/OFF

52a52

52b

+UAUX

-UAUX

IN2

IN1=1

Logic diagram concerning the Circuit Breaker monitoring Fun-CB-position.ai

RELA

YS T

RIPP

ING

MAT

RIX

LED

3, 4

52a ON/OFF

0T

CB check

52b ON/OFF

52a52

52b

+UAUX

-UAUX

IN2

IN1=1

Logic diagram concerning the Circuit Breaker monitoring


Automatic reclosure - 79Preface

The automatic reclosure function is well-used on overhead lines (when faults are self-extinguish after tripping of protection relays).To activate the Auto-reclose function the CB state acquisition must be enabled!

Operation and settings[1]

The following sequences may be selected:Rapid reclosure,Rapid reclosure + slow reclosureRapid reclosure + slow reclosure followed by one or more delayed reclosures (1...5).

Starting of the automatic reclosing function can be raised by internal protective elements or exter-nally by means binary input signals (eg: external protection device contacts or operating switches).

The following logics may be set (binary input IN3 allocation):External trip; activation command (pulse),Enabling; activation command (On = Enable).

The element may be enabled or disabled by setting ON the 79 Enable parameter available inside the Set \ AutoReclose-79 menu.

The following output functions may be coupled to the output relays:CB reclosing command (79 Close); it is indispensable for the auto reclosure function.Cycle in progress (79 Run).Reclosure fail (79 Fail).

The following timers are provided:trdt Rapid reclosure dead timetsdt Slow reclosure dead timetr Reclaim timetd Slow reclosure fault discrimination time

Rapid reclosure dead time (trdt)[2]

It is the time interval from the CB opening command and the CB reclosing command.Note 1 The CB state acquisition must be enabled; if CB check = None the 79 function is disabled

Note 2 The reclosing waiting time is calculated from the fi rst event that is detected between the reset of the trip element and the open state acquisition of the circuit breaker

•••

••

•••

••••

•

all-F79.ai

7 9 E n a b l e

5 2 a , 5 2 b , 5 2 a & 5 2 b

7 9 Tr i g g e r

7 9 - C l o s e

7 9 - R u n7 9 7 9 - F a i l

Trip I> &

Trip I>

Trip I>> &

Trip I>>

Trip IE> &

Trip IE>Trip I>> &

Trip I>>

Trip IE>> &

Trip IE>>

Tr i p P r o t E x t &

Trip EXT

≥1

Tr i p E X T

C B c h e c k

I N 3 s e l e c t

79 Enable 79 Mode 79 MC-td-EN 79 MO-RESN.DAR trdt tsdt tr td

General logic diagram of the automatic reclose function - 79 all-F79.ai

7 9 E n a b l e

5 2 a , 5 2 b , 5 2 a & 5 2 b

7 9 Tr i g g e r

7 9 - C l o s e

7 9 - R u n7 9 7 9 - F a i l

Trip I> &

Trip I>

Trip I>> &

Trip I>>

Trip IE> &

Trip IE>Trip I>> &

Trip I>>

Trip IE>> &

Trip IE>>

Tr i p P r o t E x t &

Trip EXT

≥1

Tr i p E X T

C B c h e c k

I N 3 s e l e c t

79 Enable 79 Mode 79 MC-td-EN 79 MO-RESN.DAR trdt tsdt tr td

General logic diagram of the automatic reclose function - 79


The setting time for the rapid reclosure is a compromise from the time required for the arc extinction on the fault location and the max allowable out of service time of the line.The parameter must be adjusted on the basis of the extension and grid voltage. The minimum value should allow the arc deionization and the insulation restoring in order to comply with the mechanical characteristics of the circuit breaker and the residual arc extinction.

Slow reclosure dead time (tsdt)[1]

It is the time interval from the failed fast reclosure and the start of slow reclosure sequence.The setting time for the waiting time is a function of the mechanical characteristics of the circuit breaker (data must be supplied by manufacturer). For newest circuit breakers typical values are 60 s and 180 s for oldest circuit breakers.

Reclaim time (tr)It is the time interval following the initiation of reclosure command.If no trip operation arises within the reclaim time the reclosing operation is regarded as successful and the device is ready for a new sequence.If any trip arises within the reclaim time the cycle goes on with sequence depending from the set-ting mode.

Slow reclosure fault discrimination time (td).If any trip arises within the time interval td, the cycle goes off and the failed reclosure is issued.

Rapid reclosingWith Rapid-reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid), if no faults (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time (Successful rapid reclosure), after the reclaim time the system comes back to reset; a new trip starts a rapid reclosing sequence again. Any trip within the tr time interval causes a block-ing of the sequence and a failed reclosure signal is issued (unsuccessful rapid reclosure);

Unsuccessful rapid reclosure; new fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time.The automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued.After the reclaim time, following a closed CB condition without any faults, the system comes back to reset.

Note 1 The reclosing waiting time is calculated from the fi rst event that is detected between the reset of the trip element and the open state acquisition of the circuit breaker

•

•

•

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

79-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

Reclaim timer

t

tr

Successfully rapid reclosure

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED

79-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

Reclaim timer

t

tr

Successfully rapid reclosure

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPENCB CLOSED

79RF-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

Unsuccessful rapid reclosure

CB CLOSED

Reclaim timer

Failed reclosure

tr tr

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPENCB CLOSED

79RF-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

Unsuccessful rapid reclosure

CB CLOSED

Reclaim timer

Failed reclosure

tr tr


Rapid +Slow reclosingWith Rapid+Slow reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid+Slow) if a fault (CB opening command) oc-curs within the reclaim time, after the slow reclosure dead time (tsdt) a slow reclosure is operated. Because no trip occurs within the reclaim time the system comes back to reset; any new trip starts a rapid + slow reclosing sequence again (Successful rapid + slow reclosure).

Conversely if a new fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time and the next slow reclosure is issued with fault within the slow reclosure fault discrimination time td the automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued (unsuccessful rapid + slow reclosure).

Rapid + slow reclosures and subsequent delayed reclosures

With Rapid+Slow reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid+Slow) and more than zero reclosures are enabled (79N.DAR = 1...5) if a fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time, after the slow reclosure dead time (tsdt) a slow reclosure is operated on fault detected later than td1 but within the reclaim time tr; once the reclaim time has elapsed, the delayed reclosing is issued.

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPEN

CB OPEN

CB CLOSED CB CLOSED CB CLOSED

79RLM-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

tsdt

Reclaim timer

Discrimination timer

tr tr tr

td tdFailed reclosure

Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent slow and delayed reclosures

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPEN

CB OPEN

CB CLOSED CB CLOSED CB CLOSED

79RLM-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

tsdt

Reclaim timer


tr tr tr

td tdFailed reclosure

Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent slow and delayed reclosures

CB CLOSEDCB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPENCB CLOSED

79RL-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

tsdt

Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent successfully slow reclosure

tr tr

td

Reclaim timer


CB CLOSED

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPEN CB OPENCB CLOSED

79RLF-diafram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

tsdt

tr tr

td

Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent slow reclosure still over a fault

Reclaim timer


Failed reclosure


The delayed reclosure starts the timer td (reclosure fault discrimination time); at the same time the reclaim timer tr is started; if no more trip within tr, once the reclaim time has elapsed, the system comes back to reset. (Successful rapid + slow + delayed reclosures).Conversely, if a further trip within td arises, the automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued.Following trips after the td up to fi ve reclosures may be programmed by means the N.DAR parameter available inside the Set \ Auto-reclose - 79 menu.

CB manual CLOSEThe intentional CB closing command start the reclaim (tr) and Manual close fault discrimination (td) timers if the manual close discrimination timer is enabled (79-MC-td-EN=ON).

CB manual OPENThe intentional CB opening command reset the reclaim (tr) if the Reset cycle from manual open pa-rameter is enabled (79-MO-RES=ON).

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPEN CB OPENCB CLOSED CB CLOSED

MC-tdEN-diagram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

CB manual close command

CB CLOSED

Reclaim timer

CB manual close

79-MC-td-EN

tr

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPEN CB OPENCB CLOSED CB CLOSED

MC-tdEN-diagram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

CB manual close command

CB CLOSED

Reclaim timer

CB manual close

79-MC-td-EN

tr

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPENCB OPENCB CLOSED

MO-RES-diagram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

trdt

Reset cycle from CB manual open command

CB CLOSED

Reclaim timer

CB manual open

79-MO-RES

tr tr

CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB OPENCB OPENCB CLOSED

MO-RES-diagram.ai

trdt

CB State

t

trdt

Reset cycle from CB manual open command

CB CLOSED

Reclaim timer

CB manual open

79-MO-RES

tr tr


TestThe test function allows the checking of each 50-51 and 50N-51N protection function threshold by means of the introduction of a dummy signal, with twice the setting threshold value and duration as to cause the start and/or tripping of the threshold itself, into the input circuit stages of the relay. This test does not include checking the system measuring transformers and the relevant connec-tions to the digital protection relay. Having activated the test function mode, the threshold relating to the protective function to be checked and the relevant test method must be selected. The latter may or may not include changing the status of the output relays assigned as the selected threshold start and /or trip. For the thresholds relating to protective functions 50 and 51 the dummy signal is applied simultane-ously over all phases. Example, with setting t>inv = 1 s, the operate time for the fi rst element 50/51is:

10 s with IEC/BS A characteristic13.5 s with IEC/BS B characteristic26.6 s with IEC/BS C characteristic

In cases involving selection of the test mode without any changes in the status of the output relays (“blank” Testing), upon tripping of the selected threshold, the corresponding LED is lit and the test outcome recorded as the most recent event. The test condition is shown by means of the blinking green LED ON.[1]

Test I> ledTest I>> ledTest I>>> ledTest IE> ledTest IE>> led

In cases involving selection of the test mode with changes in the status of the output relays, at the start and/or tripping of the selected threshold the corresponding programmed output relay is switched, the corresponding LED lit and the outcome recorded as the most recent event. The test condition is shown by means of the blinking green ON.[2]

Test I> fullTest I>> fullTest I>>> fullTest IE> fullTest IE>> full

For both modes the test may be ended by means of the Test off command; in any case they are ended after 2 minutes.

Oscillography Set trigger

Following parameters, available inside the Oscillography \ Setting menu, are user-programmable:

Pre-trigger time.

With setting of the Trigger parameter General start or General trip the recording starts with state change of any protection elements.With setting of the Trigger parameter Manual the recording starts with manual command (Thy-Setter).With setting of the Trigger parameter K1...K4 the recording starts with state change of the se-lected output relay.With setting of the Trigger parameter IN1, IN2, IN3 he recording starts with state change of any binary input.With setting of the rigger aux parameter Start I>, Start I>>, Start I>>>,.... the recording starts with state change of start or trip of the selected protection element.

Set measured channels

The analog measures ((iL1, iL2, iL3, iE), IL1, IL2, IL3, IE) may be select inside the Oscillography \ Setting \ Analog channel 1...4 menu.Everyone of four analog channel may be associated to one of the selected measures.

Set digital channelsThe desired I/O signals may be select inside the Oscillography \ Setting \ Digital channels menu(General start, General trip, K1... K4, , IN1, IN2, IN3).

Note 1 The test is performed (LED) even if the concerning element is assigned to almost one output relay

Note 2 The test is performed (LED & relays) even if the concerning element is assigned to almost one output relay

•••

•••••

•••••

•

•

•

•

•

•

trigger.ai

Trigger

Timepre-trigger

record length

post-trigger

0...63 T

trigger.ai

Trigger

Timepre-trigger

record length

post-trigger

0...63 T

4444 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS

5 M E A S U R E S , L O G I C S T A T E S A N D C O U N T E R S 5 M E A S U R E S , L O G I C S T A T E S A N D C O U N T E R S Measures

RMS value of fundamental component for phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)RMS value of fundamental component for measured residual current (IE)

Circuit breaker

The CB and 79 states are providedPosition Open - Closed - Unknown

and the binary inputs state:IN1-52b On/OffIN2-52a On/OffIN3-79 On/Off

CountersFor every protective element and control function several counters are available; the partial coun-ters can be cleared by the user.Every partial counter is reset to zero when ten thousand count is passed. All partial counters can be cleared by means a single command; for this purpose the Reset coun-ters command must be issued available inside the Reset menu.

Counter ST I> (start I> element)Counter ST I>> (start I>> element)Counter ST I>>> (start I>>> element)Counter ST IE> (start IE> element)Counter ST IE>> (start IE>> element)Counter TR I> (trip I> element)Counter TR I>> (trip I>> element)Counter TR I>>> (trip I>>> element)Counter TR IE> (trip IE> element)Counter TR IE>> (trip IE>> element)Counter 79 RR (Rapid reclosures)Counter 79 RL (Slow reclosures)Counter 79 RM (Delayed reclosures)Counter 79 FR P (Failed reclosures)Counter 79 FR E (Failed reclosures)Counter 79 FR X (Failed reclosures)

Fault recording - SFRRecording[1] is triggered by:

Relay activation (OFF-ON)External trigger (binary input) programmed as Fault triggerElement start or trip

Twenty events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer.[2]

Following information are stored in every record:Read \ Faults \ Info menu

Faults stored[3]

Last faultRead \ Faults \ Fault menu

Fault number (F-Number)Fault Cause (F-Cause)Fault Phases (F-Phases)Phase currents (F-IL1, F-IL2, F-IL3)Residual current IEr F-IE)Date and time (F-Year)Date and time (F-Year)Date and time (F-Month)...Date and time (F-Millisecond)

The fault log may be erased by means of the command available inside the Read \ Faults \ Reset menu.

Event recording - EventsRecording is triggered by:

Power up and/or Power down.Element start or trip.Binary input switch (OFF-ON or ON-OFF).Setting modify.Control function trip (CB switch OFF-ON or ON-OFF).

One hundred events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer (Read \ Events \ Info

Note 1 Data concerning the twenty events are stored into non volatile memory; they are held in spite of power down

Note 2 Fault 0 is the newest event, while the Fault 19 is the oldest event

Note 3 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThySetter

••

•

•••

••••••••••••••••

•••

••

••••••••••

•••••

45NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS

menu).[1]

Following information are stored in every record:Read \ Events \ Info menu

Event stored [2]

Last EventRead \ Event \ Event menu

Event number (E-Number)Event Cause (E-Cause)Date and time (E-Year)Date and time (E-Year)Date and time (E-Month)...Date and time (E-Millisecond)

InfoCode NA011-aSerial ...... (Serial number)Firmware release ...... (eg: 2.00)Nominal freq. (eg: 50 or 60 Hz)Firmware release ...... (ef: 1.00)Protocol release ...... (eg: 1.00)

Protections tripProtections trip (eg: Trip I>>)

Self-testFollowing information are available (Read \ Self test \ Info menu):

TypeSelf-test causeSelf-test latch

The relay self-test function classifi es relay operational anomalies according to three levels: - MINOR ANOMALY: The device continues to function within the possible limits with the protective devices activated; - MAJOR ANOMALY: Operation of the device may be corrected by the operator by resetting the initial (default) confi guration and hence the desired settings; - FATAL ANOMALY: All logic and protective functions are inoperative and the relay must be returned to the factory. The internal self-test function is capable of detecting the following anomalies and indicating them by means of messages: - defective auxiliary power supply (FATAL ANOMALY); - output relay coil breakage (FATAL ANOMALY); - alteration of the calibration data stored in EEPROM memory (FATAL ANOMALY); - alteration of the parameters (threshold setting, times, relays… etc.) in EEPROM memory (MAJOR ANOMALY); - alteration of the data (counters, records, ...etc.) in EEPROM memory (FATAL ANOMALY);Upon detection of at least one of the above mentioned anomalies, the output relay programmed for Self-test is switched and the information is recorded (latched).

Oscillography - DFR[3]

Upon programmable trigger, the fault records are recorded in COMTRADE format d; the sampled measures (64 sample per cycle) are stored in a circular shift memory buffer. The fault record are self-triggered; they are stored in sequential order up the allocated memory is used up after which the oldest memory is overwritten.An operating procedure example for the digital fault recording is illustrated inside the ThySetter section.

Following parameters are user-programmable:[4]

Pre-trigger time (0...63 T where T = number of power cycles; Example, with settings T=4 the pre-trig-ger duration is 80 ms with f = 50 Hz).

Selected sampled quantities.

Note 1 The newest event data are stored inside the event addressed by the Last event parameter (1...100)

Note 2 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThySetter

Note 3 The Programmable Logic Controller requires a licence; to purchase it please contact Thytronic.

Note 4 As all settings, the settings take effect only after sending the Store command

••

•••••••

••••••

•

•••

•

•

trigger.ai

Trigger

Timepre-trigger

record length

post-trigger

0...63 T

trigger.ai

Trigger

Timepre-trigger

record length

post-trigger

0...63 T

4646 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS

Analog channels (1...4) allocation.Digital channels allocation (output relay and/or binary inputs).Trigger setup; the information storage starts when a state transition on the selected signal occurs. (protective element start and/or trip, output relay and/or binary input switching).

Example 1With the following setting:

Analog channel 1: iL1Analog channel 2: iL2Analog channel 3: iL3Analog channel 4: iL4Digital channel: K1Pre-trigger: 1 T (20 ms)

the stored record length of the two records with f = 50 Hz is 240 ms

Example 2With the following setting:

Analog channel 1: iL1Analog channel 2: -Analog channel 3: -Analog channel 4: -Digital channel: K1Pre-trigger: 1 T (20 ms)

the stored record length of the two records with f = 50 Hz is 640 ms

•••

••••••

••••••

trigger.ai

Trigger

Time240 ms

1 T20 ms

trigger.ai

Trigger

Time240 ms

1 T20 ms

oscillo-phase.aiOscillographic recorder example

47NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010INSTALLATION

6 I N S T A L L A T I O N6 I N S T A L L A T I O N

6.1 PACKAGING

Packaging consists of a paperboard packaging guaranteeing adequate protection for transport and storage under normal environmental conditions. The Pro-N protection relays must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative hu-midity should not cause condensation or formation of frost.It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-cially in extreme climatic conditions.It is recommended that the packaging not be disposed of into the environment, but kept in case the relay should be moved at some later time.

6.2 MOUNTING

The devices are housed inside metal cases suitable assembly:Flush mountingRack9”.

Flush mountingThe fi xed case, fi tted with special fastening brackets, is mounted on the front of electric control board, previously drilled as indicated in the drawing.In case of side-by-side mounting of several relays the minimum drilling distance is determined by the front dimensions indicated in the overall dimensions drawing, increased by 3 mm, to ensure an adequate tolerance and gasket space between adjacent relays.The depth dimension, as indicated in the drawing, must be increased by as much as needed to allow room for the wiring.

Remove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.

••

•

75 30107

177

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

102.5 ±0.3

70

161

154

N.4 fori ø 3.5

101

171

149

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8

E1

75 30107

177

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

102.5 ±0.3

70

161

154

N.4 fori ø 3.5

101

171

149

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8

E1

Remove-t i le.aiRemoving tie to access the fastening screws Remove-t i le.aiRemoving tie to access the fastening screws

4848 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 INSTALLATION

The fi xed case is fastened by means of four screws onto the panel as indicated in the drawing.

Rack mountingFor mounting inside a standardized 19-inch system (EIA 310-D, IEC 60297 and DIN 41494 SC48D), the MAR adapter is required (available on request).

To allow opening of the keyboard door a one unit space must be provided when several rack are overlapping mounted.

•

Flush-mount1.aiFlush-mount1.ai

Rack-mount.aiRack mounting

177

(4U)

101.

6

482.6465

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

Rack-mount.aiRack mounting

177

(4U)

101.

6

482.6465

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

Rack-mount1.aiRack mounting Rack-mount1.aiRack mounting


6.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Electrical connections should be made by referring to the connection diagram; in cases where cer-tain of the circuits (communication, block, or others) are not used, the relevant connections must remain open. Examples of connection diagrams are reported on Appendix to this manual.

For the A1...A22 connections and (RS485), screw terminals with following characteristics are avail-able:

Nominal cross section: 0.14...2.5 mm2 (AWG 26...16) for single conductor da 0.14 a 0.75 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section

Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 NmStripping length: 8 mm

The connections to the current signal inputs C1...C8 can be made by ring lugs suitable for M4 screws and an insulating panel covering the terminals may be mounted for safety purposes.

•

••

Devices must be installed by qualified personnel only. No liability is accepted from Thytronic due to improper use.CAUTION Devices must be installed by qualified personnel only. No liability is accepted from Thytronic due to improper use.CAUTION

Amperometric inputs from traditional CTs

Amperometric inputs from LPCTs

RS485

12

3

RS485

12

3

B-

A+

B-

A+

UAUX

≅

A4A5K2

A2A1

A3K1

A11A10

A12K4

A13A14

A9

A7A8

A6

K3

A15A16A17A18A19

IN1

A20A21A22

IN2

IN3

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8

E1

31

2

UAUX

≅

A5A4

A6K1

A11A10

A12K4

A13A14

A3

A1A2K3

A9

A7A8K2

A15A16A17A18A19

IN1

A20A21A22

IN2

IN3

C7 C8

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

E1

31

2

LPCTSetting

(100+200)300A

EX. In=

50

200400

100

800

L3

L2

L1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Amperometric inputs from traditional CTs

Amperometric inputs from LPCTs

RS485

12

3

RS485

12

3

B-

A+

B-

A+

UAUX

≅

A4A5K2

A2A1

A3K1

A11A10

A12K4

A13A14

A9

A7A8

A6

K3

A15A16A17A18A19

IN1

A20A21A22

IN2

IN3

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8

E1

31

2

UAUX

≅

A5A4

A6K1

A11A10

A12K4

A13A14

A3

A1A2K3

A9

A7A8K2

A15A16A17A18A19

IN1

A20A21A22

IN2

IN3

C7 C8

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

E1

31

2

LPCTSetting

(100+200)300A

EX. In=

50

200400

100

800

L3

L2

L1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5


Core balanced CT[1]

Proper installation is shown in fi g. 1a and 1b.The current balance transformer, when used for measuring residual current, must be crossed in the same direction by all active conductors and hence, also by the neutral conductor if distributed, with the exception of the ground connection protective conductor. The drawing below shows cases of assembly of the toroid on unscreened and screened cables; prior to proceeding with assembly, it is necessary to check that there are no screen-to-ground connections upstream of the sensor.

In order to ensure a linear response from the sensor, the cables must be positioned in the centre of the transformer so that the magnetic effect of the three cables is perfectly compensated in the absence of residual current (Fig.2a). Hence, the assembly indicated in the drawing of fi g.2b, in which phase L3 causes local magnetic saturation whereby the vectorial sum of the three currents would be non-null, should be avoided. The same considerations also apply when the sensor is positioned near bends in the cabling. It is recommended that the transformer be placed away from bends in the conductors).The use of a balance transformer with an inside diameter about twice the diameter of the the cable going through it is recommended.

Note 1 Use of a toroid is recommended when high sensitivity is required (NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions

Fig. 1a Fig. 1b

Armoring

Load Load

Source Source

Insulated cables

Shielded cables

Armoring

Toroide.ai Current balanced transformerFig. 1a Fig. 1b

Armoring

Load Load

Source Source

Insulated cables

Shielded cables

Armoring

Toroide.ai Current balanced transformer

Fig. 2a Fig. 2b Fig. 2c

L1

L3L2

L1

L3L2

Toroide.ai Current balanced transformer


EarthA protective ground connection is required, which must be connected to the suitable screw with a separate lead of at least 2.5 mm2; the connection from A21 or a22 terminal and the ground srew is also required.[1]

CT amperometric inputsThe amperometric input circuits are assembled inside the fi xed module, so no short circuit on the secondary CTs must be provided when the removable module is pulled outIn the event of case replacement, some camps must be provided externally to shorting the second-ary CTs circuits to avoid secondary open circuit of CTs that may endanger equipment or people.

When making the current connections, attention must be paid to not exceeding the performance of the line current transformers. To be exact, the total load, constituted by the protective relay, any other protective relays or measuring instruments and the resistance of the connections, must not ex-ceed the line CT performance. In particular, consumption of the relay input circuit must not exceed 0.2 VA while the load (expressed in VA) constituted by the conductors is given by:

0.018 × L × In2 / Swhere: L the overall length, expressed in m, of the two conductors in relation to each phase; In nominal current of the line CT expressed in A;S cross sectional area of the current conductors expressed in mm2.It is recommended that cabling of a suitable thickness be used in order to limit wear of the CT sec-ondary circuits.

LPCT amperometric inputsThe amperometric input are designed for Low Power Current Transformer with 100 A - 22.5 mv ratio. Connections to NA011 device must be carried out by means RJ45 plugs, forming a part of the Trans-former.[2]

Note 1 The A21 and A22 terminal are link together inside the relay

Nota 2 For technical data please call Thytronic.

In case of disconnection CT wiring to the case, pay attention must to do not open live circuits.CAUTION In case of disconnection CT wiring to the case, pay attention must to do not open live circuits.CAUTION

rear.aiEarthing


Binary inputsThe dry input circuits, despite being galvanically isolated, must preferably be supplied with the same auxiliary voltage of the control panel.The inputs are polarity free with wide voltage range.

The optocupled inputs are immune to transitory interferences, however the following recommenda-tion must be considered in high disturbed environments:

Position input wiring away from high energy sources.Use shielded cables with ground connection on only one end (preferably at the relay side.

Output relaysFour output relays are available (SPDT, type C):

K1 and K2 (trip relays).K3 e K4 (signalling relays).

It is advisable to verify that the technical characteristic of the contacts be suitable for the applied load (about current, nominal voltage, make and break current , etc..).All contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference

RS232 portThe link from PC and NA10 serial port must be established by means a L10041 cable.

When no RS232 port is available on Personal Computer, a suitable USB to RS232 converter must be employed.After installation, the same communication port must be selected to defi ne the Thysetter parameters (typically COM4, COM5,...).

••

••

+UAUX

-UAUX

A13

A14 IN1

A B

A15

A16 IN2

A17

A18 IN3

+UAUX

-UAUX

A13

A14 IN1

A B

A15

A16 IN2

A17

A18 IN3

serial1-sch.ai

L10041Female connector USB-RS232 converter

(if none RS232 PC port is available)

TXD

RXD

DTR

GND

4

3

1

2

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

95

RJ10 Connector Pin1

serial1-sch.ai

L10041Female connector USB-RS232 converter

(if none RS232 PC port is available)

TXD

RXD

DTR

GND

4

3

1

2

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

95

RJ10 Connector Pin1


RS485 portRS485 communication circuit connections must be made using screened twisted pair cable observ-ing the polarities; screening must only be connected to the end terminating at the RS485 interface circuit pertaining to the monitoring unit. It is recommended to terminate the line at the extremities of the same; this must be performed on the RS485 line control unit and on the NA011 device placed at the furthest point connecting the specially provided resistor; termination can be made by means a jumper between the E1-E2 terminals.Termination resistors allow adjusting the impedance of the line, reducing the infl uence of the induc-tive components of the same, which might compromise good communication.

RS485

120 Ω

SUPERVISION UNIT

OUTP

UT R

ELAY

S

UAUXA1 ≅

A2

A9

A10

A11A12

A13

A14

E1

E1

THYB

US

D1

ETHE

RNET

A3A4A5A6A7A8

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K1

RS48

5

F1F2F3F4F5A+

A+

B-

B-

BLOC

K OU

T

BLOC

K IN A15BLOUT-

BLOUT+ A16

BIN

ARY

INPU

TSA19

A18A17

IN1

IN2

A20A21A22

C1IL1

IL2

IL3

IE

CURR

ENT

INPU

TSC2C3

C4C5

C6

C7

C8

Pro-N

RS23

2

FRONT PANEL

RS485-wir ing.ai

NA011

RS48

5

1

23A+

B-


6.4 NOMINAL CURRENT In AND IEn SETTINGS

Factory default settings: Nominal phase current In: 5 A (NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx2 versions)Nominal residual current IEn: 1 A (NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions)

To modify settings, the dip-switches placed on the front board must be changed (the case must be open).

The following operations must be performed:Remove the auxiliary supplyRemove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.

Unscrew gradually back to back the four fastening screw in order avoid loss of the internal washer.Unmounting of the case from the switchboard is not needed.Rotate the MMI module with care to not disconnect the fl at cable.

Avoid touching the printed circuit and connections[1],

Note 1 There are components present which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. When the module is removed, it is important to pay particular attention to avoid any accidental contact with the internal components. In order to avoid the static electricity accumulated in the human body from causing damage, it is recommended to observe the following precautions: - eliminate any potential differences between the human body and the device by touching the metallic case, - avoid touching the printed circuit and connections (tracks, component terminals), - avoid handing the device to others, - set the programming DIPs by using antistatic tools.

••

••

•••

•

Turn off power supply before opening the case.CAUTION Turn off power supply before opening the case.CAUTION

Remove-t i le.aiRemoving tie to access the fastening screws Remove-t i le.aiRemoving tie to access the fastening screws


Set the dip-switches on the top of the circuit board in accordance with the drawing shown below,.

Move dip-switches according the following layout.[1]

Note1 On NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx1 versions (without residual input circuit), the IE setting is not meaningful. Place switches 1 ... 4 according to the number on the printed circuit board (not considering the numbers on the component)

•

•

Dip-swithes positionDip-swithes position

Dip-switch localization concerning the nominal current setting inside the front board

Default settings:- In =5 A- IEn =1 A

Settings:- In =5 A- IEn =5 A



1 A

5 A

ON

IL1

IL3

IL2

IE

1 A

5 A

ON

IL1

IL3

IL2

IE

1 A

5 A

ON

IL1

IL3

IL2

IE

1 A

5 A

ON

IL1

IL3

IL2

IE

1234

1234

1234

1234


6.5 NOMINAL CURRENT In SETTING FOR LPCT

Factory default settings: Primary nominal phase current In: 300 ANominal residual current IEn: 1 A (NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions as shown in the previous pages)

To modify the phase rated currents, the dip-switches placed on the rear panel must be set.

••

C7 C8

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

E1

31

2

LPCTSetting

(100+200)300A

EX. In=

50

200400

100

800

50

200400

100

800

L3

L2

L1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

In= 300 A (100 + 200) Factory default setting

In= 50 A Minimum setting

In= 1250 A (800 + 400 + 50) Maximum setting

configuration is not allowed


6.6 LED ALLOCATION

Eight indicator LEDs and six keys are available on the front panel:

6.7 FINAL OPERATIONS

Before energizing the electric board, it is advisable to check that:The auxiliary voltage in the panel falls within the operative range of relays.The rated current of the line CT’s corresponds to the settings of relay.All wirings are correct.All screws are tightly screwed.

••••

Start

79CB CLOSED (52b)CB OPEN (52a)

50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>>)50N-51N (IE>, IE>>)

Trip

CB Open

CB Close

Start


50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>>)50N-51N (IE>, IE>>)

Trip

CB Open

CB Close

5858 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 SETTING AND COMMISSIONING

7 P R O G R A M M I N G A N D S E T T I N G S7 P R O G R A M M I N G A N D S E T T I N G S

All relay programming and adjustment operations may be performed through MMI (keyboard and display) or using a Personal Computer with the aid of the ThySetter software.

7.1 SW ThySetter

The ThySetter sw is a “browser” of data (setting, measure, etc..); it implements an engine that is afford to rebuild the menu set up and the relationships to data concerning all Thytronic protective relays by means of XML fi les.

ThySetter installationThe latest release of ThySetter can be downloaded free of charge from the www.thytronic.it site (PRODUCT/SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS/THY-SETTER/download area), or from www.pro-n.it site (Software pc - area download).

ThySetter usePlease refer to ThySetter user manual for detailed instructions.The document is available on www.pro-n.it site (Software pc - area download) or the www.thytronic.it site (PRODUCT/SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS/THY-SETTER/download area).

WARNINGFor safety reasons, a change of the following parameters become active only after an hw reset:- Relay nominal frequency (fn)- Ethernet communication parameters (IP host address, IP net mask, Autonegotiation).

WARNINGFor safety reasons, a change of the following parameters become active only after an hw reset:- Relay nominal frequency (fn)- Ethernet communication parameters (IP host address, IP net mask, Autonegotiation).






59NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010SETTING AND COMMISSIONING

7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface)

On the front panel there are eight buttons which allow the user to perform all the settings, reading and modifi cation operations.

The adjustment of the settings and the operation mode of the output relays must be performed while the unit is electrically powered; the alphanumeric display shows the necessary information with reference to the operations performed through the keyboard. All preset values are permanently stored in the nonvolatile memory.The buttons take the following operations:

- (Up) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options

- (Down) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options

- (Left) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options

- (Right) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options

- (Enter) access to the selected menu with the option of modifying any given parameter

- (Reset) abort the current changes and/or accessing the previous menu

At power-up, the display shows the text:“THYTRONICNA011-adate and time: (01/01/2000 00:00”The ON green Led points out the auxiliary power supply voltage (permanent lighted) and possible faults (blink lighted).The display backlight is automatically activated when any key switch is set.

By means of the (Up) or (Down) buttons, it is possible to cyclically browse through the menu op-tions: Read, Set, Oscillography, Communication, Test, Reset, Time, Option

Having identifi ed the sub-menu of interest, it is possible to gain access by using the (Right) button

and then analogously, run through the relevant options by using the (Up) or (Down) buttons. The full menu tree and some examples are showed in the following pages (numerical values and settings are pointed out as examples and does not agree with real situations.

Reading variables (READ)All data (measure, settings, parameters, etc...) may be displayed:“Measures >”“Digital inputs >”“AutoReclose - 79 >”“Circuit breaker >”“Counters >”“Last fault >”“Info >”“Protection trip >”“Self-test >”

Setting modifying (SET)To effect a change, having identifi ed the parameter intended for change, the following procedure must be performed:

Select the parameter going through the menus by means the , and keys.

Begin the setting phase by means of the key; the he modifi cation in progress status is high-lighted by the symbol “E” fl ashing in the upper right area of the display.

Change the parameter by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons.

•

•

•

Start


50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>>)50N-51N (IE>, IE>>)

Trip

CB Open

CB Close

Start


50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>>)50N-51N (IE>, IE>>)

Trip

CB Open

CB Close


Press the (Enter) button; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the fl ashing “E” to be replaced by the symbol “!”. On must be remember that changes are NOT ac-tive until the Store command, located in the “Set” menu has been used; in this regard, once the

“Store” message is displayed, it is necessary to use the (Enter) button; this results in the

“execute” message with the symbol “C” fl ashing.

Browse the menu by means of the and or keys to go in the Store menu.

Press the (Enter) button; once more concludes the save procedure with the temporary appear-

ance of the message “ok!”. After one or more modifi cations, the status of having data that has still not been permanently saved is indicated by the “!” symbol in the top right and the display message “WARNING set Clear..

Store” which appears while browsing through the main menu with the use of the or keys. The Clear command may be used to abandon unsaved changes (prior to use of the Store com-mand); the same effect is achieved by switching the key to the OFF position or removing the auxil-iary power supply to the relay.

ExampleTo set the K1 relay with Energized mode and latched mode (Energized, Latched) the following sequence must be operated:

Select the Set menu “Set >”by means of the key.

Press the key; the message “Base >” is displayed.

Browse the menus with “Relays >”“50/51 >”“50N/51N >”“AutoReclose - 79 >”“Circuit breaker >”“Clear >”“Store >”

Select the “Relays >”, menu; the message “K1 None >” is displayed.

Press the key; the message “K1 Logic De-energized” is displayed.

Press the key; the he modifi cation in progress status is highlighted by the symbol “E” fl ashing in the upper right area of the display.

Change the parameter by means the or keys; the message “K1 Logic Energized” is displayed.

Press the key; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the fl ashing “E” to be replaced by the symbol “!”.

Press the key; the message “K1 mode No-latched” is displayed.

Press the key; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the fl ashing “E” to be replaced by the symbol “!”.

Change the parameter by means the (increment) or (decrement) buttons; the message “K1 mode Latched” is displayed.

Press the (Enter) button; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the fl ashing “E” to be replaced by the symbol “!”

Press the key and or to go inside the Store menu.

Press the key; this results in the “execute ?” message with the symbol “C” fl ashing.

Answer with key to confi rm setting.The end of the setting sequence is signalled by the “ok!” message.

The Reset key may be used to abort unsaved changes (prior to use of the Store command); the same effect is achieved by switching the key to the OFF position or removing the auxiliary power supply to the NA011 relay.

TestThe operational tests with or without command of the associated output relays may be performed.

Browse the main menu by means the or keys until the “Test” message is displayed; press

the key to enter and subsequently select the test by means of the or keys.

Test I> ledTest I>> ledTest I>>> ledTest IE> ledTest IE>> ledTest I> fullTest I>> fullTest I>>> full

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

••••••••


Test IE> fullTest IE>> full

ExampleTo set the K1 test on the I> element, the following sequence must be operate:

Select the “Test I> full >” menu.

Press the key to enter ; this results in the “execute ?” message with the symbol “C” fl ashing.

Press the key to enter; the test in progress condition is marked by “ok! “ message and blinking of the led ON.[1]

To stop test select the “Test off >” menu, press the key and answer with a further activa-

tion of the key to the “Test off execute? >>” message.

CommunicationInside the Communication menu the setting data of the serial communication ports (rate, stop bit, parity and address) for RS485 Modbus and IEC60870-5-103 may be adjusted.

Browse the main menu by means the or keys until the “Protocol RS485 Modbus >”

message is displayed; press the key to enter; the he modifi cation in progress status is highlighted by the symbol “E” fl ashing in the upper right area of the display.

Select the right menu by means of the or keys “Protocol RS485 Modbus >” or “Protocol RS485 IEC60870-5-103 >”

By means of the or keys adjust the address; the “Address 1” message is displayed and enter the intended value. Similarly for all the parameters:

“Address 1” “Baudrate RS485 9600” “Enable TX delay 2 ms” “Start TX delay 2 ms”

By means of the key and next or go inside the Store menu.

Press the key; this results in the “execute ?” message with the symbol “C” fl ashing.

Answer with key to confi rm settingThe end of the setting sequence is signalled by the “ok!” message.

The Reset h key may be used to abort unsaved changes (prior to use of the Store command); the same effect is achieved by switching the key to the OFF position or removing the auxiliary power supply to the NA011 relay.

ResetInside the Reset menu the clearing of counters (Reset counters) LEDs and relays (Reset alarm) may be operated.

DEFAULT (Option)Available inside the Option menu are the confi guration parameter reset (Default) commands.Set default PARSet default REEIn case of any anomalies detected by the self-test function, where confi guration data has become corrupted, it is possible to restore the factory default settings. In particular, using the command “Set default PAR”, the calibration data is restored (thresholds, times, output relay assignment etc), whilst with the command “Set default REE” all the updated variables (counters, ...etc) and the serial com-munication parameters are automatically reset. Except for extraordinary situations, it is not necessary to use such commands which in any case allow the restoration of the factory set default values following an anomaly. Following use of this command, it is necessary to then proceed with the setting of the desired set-tings and/or the calibration of the voltages just as in the case for first installation.

Data/time setting (Time)To effect a change, (year, month,...) the modifi cation may be confi rmed by using the key. Likewise the Set menu the modifi cation in progress status is highlighted by the symbol “E” fl ashing in the upper right area of the display.

Subsequently, it is possible to change the parameter by means of the or keys (the “E” symbol continues to flash to highlight the Editing status); upon reaching the desired value, it is necessary

to once more use the key. Acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the flashing “E” to be replaced by the symbol “!”. Differently from the Set menu the changes are stored and became active immediately without the Store command.

Circuit breaker commandsBy means of the (Open) and (Close) keys the circuit breaker command may be issued.The committed output relays must be enabled inside the Set \ Relays menu.

Note 1 The tests are active only if the selected function is assigned to an output relay

••

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•


7.3 MENU TREE

Read

Info

Code NA011-CB0-b

Serial Firmware release 0.0 0

nominal freq. Hz 50

Clock

Year 2000 ... 2099 step = 1

Month 1 ... 12 step = 1

Day 1 ... 31 step = 1

Hour h 0 ... 23 step = 1

Minute m 0 ... 59 step = 1

Second s 0 ... 59 step = 1

Measures

IL1 A/In 0 ... 0 step = 0

IL2 A/In 0 ... 0 step = 0

IL3 A/In 0 ... 0 step = 0

IE A/IEn 0 ... 0 step = 0

Inp value 1 ... 99 step = 1

100 ... 1000 step = 5

Inp unit A

IEnp value 1 ... 99 step = 1

100 ... 1000 step = 5

IEnp unit A Reading Direct

Protections trip

Protections trip None

AutoReclose - 79

79 ActiveMode OFF

79 Run OFF

79 CycleStyle Reset

79 Residual-time s 0 ... 0 step = 0

79 LastEvent None

Circuit breaker

Position Unknown

Digital inputs

IN1 - 52b OFF

IN3 - 52a OFF

IN3 - 79 OFF

Counters

Counter ST I> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter ST I>> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter ST I>>> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter ST IE> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter ST IE>> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter TR I> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter TR I>> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter TR I>>> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter TR IE> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter TR IE>> 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Description Parameter Unit Setting range



Counter 79 RR 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter 79 SR 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter 79 DR 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter 79 FR P 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter 79 FR E 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Counter 79 FR X 0 ... 10000 step = 1

Self-test

Self-test None

Self-test cause None

Self-test latch None

Faults

Info

Faults stored 0 ... 20 step = 1

Last fault 0 ... 20 step = 1

Fault

F-Number 0 ... 20 step = 1

F-Cause None

F-Phases None

F-IL1 In 0 ... 0 step = 0

F-IL2 In 0 ... 0 step = 0

F-IL3 In 0 ... 0 step = 0

F-IE IEn 0 ... 0 step = 0

F-Year 2000 ... 2099 step = 1

F-Month 1 ... 12 step = 1

F-Day 1 ... 31 step = 1

F-Hour h 0 ... 23 step = 1

F-Minute m 0 ... 59 step = 1

F-Second s 0 ... 59 step = 1

F-Millisecond ms 0 ... 999 step = 1

Reset

Events

Info

Events stored 0 ... 50 step = 1

Last event 0 ... 50 step = 1

Event

E-Number E-cause E-Year 2000 ... 2099 step = 1

E-Month 1 ... 12 step = 1

E-Day 1 ... 31 step = 1

E-Hour h 0 ... 23 step = 1

E-Minute m 0 ... 59 step = 1

E-Second s 0 ... 59 step = 1

E-Millisecond ms 0 ... 999 step = 1

Reset

Set

Base

Inp value 1 ... 99 step = 1

100 ... 1000 step = 5

Inp unit A

IEnp value 1 ... 99 step = 1

100 ... 1000 step = 5



IEnp unit A Reading Direct/Relative

Relays

K1 None

K1 logic De -energized/Energized

K1 mode No-latched/Latched

K1 tTR ms 10 ... 500 step = 10

K2 None



K2 tTR ms 10 ... 500 step = 10

K3 None



K3 tTR ms 10 ... 500 step = 10

K4 None



K4 tTR ms 10 ... 500 step = 10

AutoReclose - 79

79 Enable OFF

79 Mode Rapid / Rapid+Slow

79 N.DAR 0 ... 5 step = 1

79 trdt s 0.1 ... 19.9 step = 0.1

20 ... 60 step = 1

79 tsdt s 1 ... 200 step = 1

79 td s 0 ... 10 step = 1

79 tr s 1 ... 200 step = 1

79 MC-td-EN OFF

79 MO-RES OFF

79 Trigger None

79 IN3 select None

50/51

I> Element

I> Setpoint

I>Curve DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C,

ANSI/IEEE MI , ANSI/IEEE VI , ANSI/IEEE EI

ICLP> Off, On Bloching, On Changing

tCLP> s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

t>RES ms 0 ... 1000 step = 10

I> Defi nite

I>def In

0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1

ICLP>def In

0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1

t>def s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01

I> Inverse

I>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 2.50 step = 0.01

ICLP>inv In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 2.50 step = 0.01



t>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1

I>> Element

I>> Setpoint

ICLP>> Off, On Bloching, On Changing

tCLP>> s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

t>>RES ms 0 ... 1000 step = 10

I>> Defi nite

I>>def In

0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1

ICLP>>def In

0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1

t>>def s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01

I>>> Element

I>>> Setpoint

ICLP>>> Off, On Bloching, On Changing

tCLP>>> s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

t>>>RES ms 0 ... 1000 step = 10

I>>> Defi nite

I>>>def In

0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1

ICLP>>>def In

0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1

t>>>def s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01

50N/51N

IE> Element

IE> Setpoint

IE>Curve DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C,

ANSI/IEEE MI , ANSI/IEEE VI , ANSI/IEEE EI

IECLP> Off, On Bloching, On Changing

tECLP> s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

tE>RES ms 0 ... 1000 step = 10

IE> Defi nite

IE>def IEn 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01

IECLP>def IEn 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01

tE>def s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01

IE> Inverse

IE>inv In 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01

IECLP>inv In 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01

tE>inv s 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1

IE>> Element

IE>> Setpoint

IECLP>> Off, On Bloching, On Changing

tECLP>> s 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01

10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1

tE>>RES ms 0 ... 1000 step = 10

IE>> Defi nite



IE>>def IEn 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01

IECLP>>def IEn 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001

1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01

tE>>def s 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01

Breaker failure

BF Enable None , Trip I>, Trip I>>, Trip I>>>, Trip IE>, Trip IE>>

tBF s 0.10 ... 0.99 step = 0.01

1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.05

Circuit breaker

CB check None, 52a, 52b, 52a/52b

Store

Oscillography

Info

Record stored 0 ... 2 step = 1

Last stored 0 ... 2 step = 1

Recorded state Init

Setting

Pre-trigger T 0 ... 63 step = 1

Trigger None, Manual, General start, General trip, IN1,

IN2, IN3, K1, K2, K3, K4, Auxiliary

Trigger aux Start I<, Start I>>, Start I>>>, Start IE>, Start IE>>,

Trip I>, Trip I>>, RTrip I>>>, Trip IE>, Trip IE>>

Digital channel General start, General trip, IN1, IN2, IN3, K1, K2,

K3, K4

Analog channel 1 OFF, iL1, iL2, iL3, iE, measure IL1, measure IL2,

measure IL3, measure IE







Communication

Protocol RS485 Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103

Address 1 ... 247 step = 1

Baudrate RS485 1200, 2400., 4800, 9600, 19200 , 38499, 57600

Enable TX delay ms 0 ... 50 step = 1

Start TX delay ms 0 ... 10 step = 1


7.4 MAINTENANCE

The devices do not require any particular maintenance; all circuits use high quality static com-ponents, the subassembly products undergo dynamic checks on their functioning before the fi nal assembling of the complete equipment. The dedicated circuits and the fi rmware for the self-test function continuously check the relay operation; the continuously operating auto-zeroing function dynamically corrects the measuring errors due to offset, heat dependent drifts, aging of components, etc.The microprocessor is equipped with a watch-dog circuit which restores the correct operation of the fi rmware in case of fault.The possibility of reading the value of the signals measured on the display (the relay used as an am-meter) allows one to check both the system parameters and the operation of the protection relays at any time. The relay can be preset as well to show the current values referred to the nominal current of the current transformers, as directly in primary amperes (according to the preset value of CT’s nominal primary current); the same is done for the input voltages.If connected to the central control unit, all data available on the display can be checked and pro-cessed thus performing a continuous check and maintenance.

7.5 REPAIR

No repair of possible faults by the client is foreseen; if following to any irregularity of operation, the above tests confi rm the presence of a fault, it will be necessary to send the relay to the factory for the repair and the consequent settings and checks.

7.6 PACKAGING

The devices must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative humidity should not cause condensation or formation of frost.It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, espe-cially in extreme climatic conditions, it is recommended that the device is supplied with power for some hours before the commissioning, in order to bring the circuits to the rating conditions and to stabilize the operation of the components.

6868 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 APPENDIX

8 A P P E N D I X8 A P P E N D I X

8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves

Mathematical formulaThe mathematical formula, according the IEC 60255-3/BS142 standards is:[1]

Where:t = operate time (in seconds)tI>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)I = input currentI>inv = threshold setting

K coeffi cient:K = 0.14 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse)K = 13.5 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse)K = 80 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse)

α curve shape constant:α = 0.02 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse)α = 1 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse)α = 2 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse)

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>invMinimum operate time: 0.1 sRange where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20 If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and 50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section


Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50 In and 10 IEn respectively.

••••

•••

•••

••••

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)α-1]

Kt = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)α-1]

K

69NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010APPENDIX

Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)

F_51-IECA-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

t>inv = 10 s

t>inv = 60 s

t>inv = 5 s

t>inv = 1 s

t>inv = 0.5 s

t>inv = 0.2 s

t>inv = 0.1 s

t>inv = 0.02 s

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)0.02-1]

0.14

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 700


Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)

F_51-IECB-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

t>inv = 10 s

t>inv = 60 s

t>inv = 5 s

t>inv = 1 s

t>inv = 0.5 s

t>inv = 0.2 s

t>inv = 0.02 s

t>inv = 0.1 s

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv) -1]

13.5

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 14.5


phase overcurrent 50/51 - extremely inverse time curve (iec 60255-3/Bs142 type c)

F_51-IECC-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20

I /I >inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000

100000t [s]

t>inv = 10 s

t>inv = 60 s

t>inv = 5 s

t>inv = 1 s

t>inv = 0.5 st>inv = 0.2 st>inv = 0.02 s t>inv = 0.1 s

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)2-1]

80

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 9


residual overcurrent 50n/51n - standard inverse time curve (iec 60255-3/Bs142 type a)

F_51N-IECA-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IE /IE>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

tE>inv = 10 s

tE>inv = 60 s

tE>inv = 5 s

tE>inv = 1 s

tE>inv = 0.5 s

tE>inv = 0.2 s

tE>inv = 0.1 s

tE>inv = 0.02 s

t = tE>inv · [(IE/IE>inv)0.02-1]

0.14

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE/IE>inv = 700


residual overcurrent 50n/51n - very inverse time curve (iec 60255-3/Bs142 type B)

F_51N-IECB-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I E/IE>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

tE>inv = 10 s

tE>inv = 60 s

tE>inv = 5 s

tE>inv = 1 s

tE>inv = 0.5 s

tE>inv = 0.2 s

tE>inv = 0.02 s

tE>inv = 0.1 s

t = tE>inv · [(IE/IE>inv) -1]

13.5

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE/IE>inv = 14.5


residual overcurrent 50n/51n - extremely inverse time curve (iec 60255-3/Bs142 type c)

F_51-IECC-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20

IE /IE>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000

100000t [s]

tE>inv = 10 s

tE>inv = 60 s

tE>inv = 5 s

tE>inv = 1 s

tE>inv = 0.5 stE>inv = 0.2 stE>inv = 0.02 s tE>inv = 0.1 s

t = tE>inv · [(IE/IE>inv)2-1]

80

Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE/IE>inv = 9


8.2 APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves

mathematical formulaThe mathematical formula, according the ANSI/IEEE standards is:[1]

Where:t = operate time (in seconds)tI>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds)I = input currentI>inv = threshold setting

K coefficient:K = 0.01 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curveK = 3.922 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curveK = 5.64 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

α curve shape constant:α = 0.02 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curveα = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curveα = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

L coefficient:L = 0.023 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curveL = 0.098 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curveL = 0.024 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve

For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies:Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I>invMinimum operate time: 0.1 sRange where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 ≤ I /I>inv ≤ 20 If I> pickup ≥ 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In

Note Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/5 and 50N/5N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section

Note When the input value is more than 0 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 0 times the set point

Nota 3 With setting more than .5 In for the 50/5 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/5N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50 In and 0 IEn respectively.

••••

•••

•••

•••

••••

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)α-1]

K + Lt = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)α-1]

K + L


phase overcurrent 50/51 - moderately inverse time curve (ansi/ieee type mi)

F_51-ANSIEI-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I >inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

t>inv = 10 s

t>inv = 60 s

t>inv = 5 st>inv = 0.5 s

t>inv = 1 s

t>inv = 0.2 s

t>inv = 0.1 s

t>inv = 0.02 s

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)2 -1]

5.64 + 0.024



phase overcurrent 50/51 - very inverse time curve (ansi/ieee type vi)

F_51-ANSIMI-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I >inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

t>inv = 10 s

t>inv = 60 s

t>inv = 5 s

t>inv = 1 s

t>inv = 0.02 s

t>inv = 0.2 s

t>inv = 0.1 st>inv = 0.5 s

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)0.02 -1]

0.01 + 0.023



phase overcurrent 50/51 - extremely inverse time curve (ansi/ieee type ei)

F_51-ANSIVI-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 I /I >inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

t>inv = 10 s

t>inv = 60 s

t>inv = 5 s

t>inv = 1 s

t>inv = 0.5 s

t>inv = 0.2 s

t>inv = 0.1 s

t>inv = 0.02 s

t = t>inv · [(I/I>inv)2 -1]

3.922 + 0.092



residual overcurrent 50n/51n - moderately inverse time curve (ansi/ieee type mi)

F_51N-ANSIEI-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IE/IE>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

tE>inv = 10 s

tE>inv = 60 s

tE>inv = 5 stE>inv = 0.5 s

tE>inv = 1 s

tE>inv = 0.2 s

tE>inv = 0.1 s

tE>inv = 0.02 s

t = tE>inv · [(IE/IE>inv)2 -1]

5.64 + 0.024



residual overcurrent 50n/51n - very inverse time curve (ansi/ieee type vi)

F_51N-ANSIMI-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IE/IE>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

tE>inv = 10 s

tE>inv = 60 s

tE>inv = 5 s

tE>inv = 1 s

tE>inv = 0.02 s

tE>inv = 0.2 s

tE>inv = 0.1 stE>inv = 0.5 s

t = tE>inv · [(IE/IE>inv)0.02 -1]

0.01 + 0.023



residual overcurrent 50n/51n - extremely inverse time curve (ansi/ieee type ei)

F_51N-ANSIVI-Char.ai

1.12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 IE/IE>inv0.01

0.1

1

10

100

1000

10000t [s]

tE>inv = 10 s

tE>inv = 60 s

tE>inv = 5 s

tE>inv = 1 s

tE>inv = 0.5 s

tE>inv = 0.2 s

tE>inv = 0.1 s

tE>inv = 0.02 s

t = tE>inv · [(IE/IE>inv)2 -1]

3.922 + 0.092



8.2 APPENDIX B1 - I/O DiagramNote: Some typical connection diagram are shown. All diagram must be considered just as example; they cannot be comprehensive for real applications. For all diagrams the output contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference. The residual current input (pin C7-C8) is available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions

NA016-I-O.aiInput-output circuits

alternative versionsto be selected when ordering

Traditional CT input circuits Low powerCT input circuits (LPCTs)

NA011

C1IL1

IL2

IL3

IE

CURR

ENT

INPU

TS

C2C3

C4C5

C6

C7

C8C7

C8

RS23

2

FRONT PANEL

A13IN1

IN2

IN3

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

OUTP

UT R

ELAY

S A4A6A5

K2

A2A1A3

K1

A11A12A10

K4

A9A8A7

K3

UAUXA19 ≅

A20

A22A21

B- E1

RS48

5

1

2

3

120Ω

A+

CIrcuit Breaker Position

79 IN3 Select

CIrcuit Breaker Position

79 IN3 Select

NA011

IE

CURR

ENT

INPU

TS

C7

C8

C7

C8RS

232

FRONT PANEL

A13IN1

IN2

IN3

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

OUTP

UT R

ELAY

S A9A8A7

K2

A5A4A6

K1

A11A12A10

K4

A3A2A1

K3

UAUXA19 ≅

A20

A22A21

B- E1

RS48

5

1

2

3

120Ω

A+

L1

L2

L3

NA011#xxx2

NA011#xxx0

NA011#xxx3

NA011#xxx1


8.3 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces

Interfaces.ai

NA011

RS23

2

FRONT PANEL

A22A21

B- E1

RS48

5

1

2

3

120Ω

A+


8.4 APPENDIX B3 - Connection diagrams

CB position

NA011

C1IL1

IL2

IL3

P1S1S2

P2C2C3

C4C5

C6

C7

C8

A13IN1

IN2

IN3

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

DG

C7

C8

IE

P1S1S2

P2

Three phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT (NA011#xxx2) or calculated (NA011#xxx0)

Circuit Breaker Position

79 IN3 Select

NA011#xxx0

NA011#xxx2

50/51

50N/51N

50N/51N



NA016-SCH2.ai

C2

C1

C3

C4C5

C6

P1S1S2

P2

IL1

IL2

IL3

CB position

NA011

A13IN1

IN2

IN3

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

DG

50/51

IE

P1S1S2

P2

C7

C8 50N/51N

Two phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT

Circuit Breaker Position

79 IN3 Select

Note 1

Note 1: when only two phase CTs are available, the residual current must be measured (cannot be calculated from the phase currents)


C7

C8

IE

NA011#xxx0

NA011#xxx250N/51N

50N/51N

NA011

P1S1S2

P2

C7

C8

RS23

2

FRONT PANEL

A13IN1

IN2

IN3

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

OUTP

UT R

ELAY

S A4A6A5

K2

A2A1A3

K1

A11A12A10

K4

A9A8A7

K3

UAUXA19 ≅

A20

A22A21

B- E1

RS48

5

1

2

3

120Ω

A+

DG 52a 52b

-UAUX

-UAUX

+UAUX

+UAUX

C1IL1

IL2

IL3 CTs

CURR

ENT

INPU

TS

P1S1S2

P2C2C3

C4C5

C6

79 IN3 Select

79 Enable/79 External trip

CB position


example of connection diagram with traditional ct inputs and acquisition of cB states and auto reclose enable/start


C7

C8

IE

NA011#xxx1

NA011#xxx350N/51N

50N/51N L

PCTs

CUR

REN

T IN

PUTSIL1

IL2

IL3

P1

46

+-

46

+-

46

+-

P2

S1S2 L1

L2

SettingLPCT

800 A400 A

200 A100 A

50 A

L3

In=50...1250A

NA011

P1S1S2

P2

C7

C8

RS23

2

FRONT PANEL

A13IN1

IN2

IN3

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

UAUXA19 ≅

A20

A22A21

B- E1

RS48

5

1

2

3

120Ω

A+

DG 52a 52b

-UAUX

-UAUX

+UAUX

+UAUX

79 IN3 Select

79 Enable/79 External trip

CB position

OUTP

UT R

ELAY

S A9A8A7

K2

A5A4A6

K1

A11A12A10

K4

A3A2A1

K3


example of connection diagram with low power ct inputs and acquisition of cB states and auto reclose enable/start


8.5 APPENDIX C - Dimensions

75 30

10717

7

102.5 ±0.3

7016

115

4

SIDE VIEW CUTOUT

FRONT VIEW

ON 41 32 5

TRIP

START

REAR VIEW

IDENTIFICATION LABEL LEDs

Traditional CT inputs Low power CT inputs

N.4 holes ø 3.5

ON & Diagnostic

StartTrip

NA011#xxx0

In 5A 1A


5A

UAUX 24-230 Vac/dc12345

NA011#xxx1

IIn

n



UAUX 24-230 V12345

NA011#xxx2

In 5A 1A


5A


12345

NA011#xxx3

IIn

n



IEn 1A 1A 5A UAUX 24-230 V12345

101

171

149

101

171

149

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

C1 C2

C4C3

C5 C6

C7 C8 C7 C8

E1

F1

D1

RX

TX

F2F3F4F5

A1A2

A3A4A5

A6A7A8

A9A10A11

A12A13A14

A15A16

A17A18

A19A20

A21A22

B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8

E1

31

2

31

2

LPCTSetting

(100+200)300A

EX. In=

50

200400

100

800

L3

L2

L1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5


8.6 APPENDIX D - Revisions history

DSPFirmwareRelease

SWRelease

Documentation Communication Upgrade procedures Description

1.001.16

1.161.16

--

--

NA011-Manual-08-2009NA011-Manual-05-2010

NA011-Manual-05-2010NA011-Manual-05-2010

ThySetter 3.5.3ThySetter 3.5.7

ThySetter 3.5.8ThySetter 3.6.0

--

--

First editionAdded references to versions with / without residual input current, inverse time on the 50N/51N element, Cold Load Pickup (CLP), Breaker Failure (BF)Correct numbering on output relay for LPCT version (different from the CTs versions)Typographical detailsCorrect error inside pag.25 (Automatic reclosing enable/external trip schematic)

headquarter: 20139 Milano - Piazza Mistral, 7 - Tel. +39 02 574 957 01 ra - Fax +39 02 574 037 63Factory: 35127 Padova - Z.I. Sud - Via dell’Artigianato, 48 - Tel. +39 049 894 770 1 ra - Fax +39 049 870 139 0

www.thytronic.it [email protected] www.pro-n.it

8.7 APPENDIX E - EC Declaration of conformity

Manufacturer: THYTRONIC S.p.A.

Address: Piazza Mistral 7 - 20139 MILANO

The undersigned manufacturer herewith declares that the product

Protection relay - type NA011

is in conformity with the previsions of the following EC directives (including all applicable amendments) when installed in accordance with the installation instructions:

Reference n° title

2006/95/EC2004/108/EC

Low Voltage DirectiveEMC Directive

Reference of standards and/or technical specifications applied for this declaration of conformity or parts thereof:

- harmonized standards:

nr issue title

EN 61010-1

EN 50263

EN 61000-6-4 (EN 50081-2)

EN 61000-6-2 (EN 50082-2)

11.2001

08.2000

11.2007

12.2005

Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)Product standard for measuring relays and protection equipments

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)Emission standard for industrial environments

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)Immunity standard for industrial environments

- other standards and/or technical specifications:

nr issue title

CEI 0-16

EN 61810-1

EN 60255-6 (CEI 95-1)

IEC 60255

07.2008

02.2004

05.1998

Regola tecnica di riferimento per la connessione di Utenti attivi e passivi alle reti AT e MT delle imprese distributrici di energia elettrica

Electromechanical elementary relaysGeneral and safety requirements

Electrical relays - Part 6: General requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment

Electrical relays

Year of CE marking: 009

Signature ............................................. Name FIORE Ing. GIOACCHINO Title Managing director Date 07-009

Data Elecin

Documents

Transcript of Data Elecin